ALRE IT Catalogue

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 176

Building Automation

Control Engineering
Sensors

Product Catalogue 2007


Produ
ct Cat
alogu
e 200
7
Building Automation · Control Engineering · Sensors

s
ing field
ngineer
lutions
ontrol e
ent So
for all c
ALRE-IT Regeltechnik GmbH Phone: +49 (0) 30 / 3 99 84-0
Richard-Tauber-Damm 10 Fax: +49 (0) 30 / 3 91 70 05
D-12277 Berlin

Intellig
Internet: www.alre.de
E-mail: [email protected]
Head Office Representation Austria
Alre-IT Regeltechnik GmbH eh-technik
Richard-Tauber-Damm 10 Reinbacher GmbH + Co KG
D-12277 Berlin Fachvertrieb für Heizsysteme und
Phone: +49 (0) 30/399 84 - 0 Regeltechnik
Fax: +49 (0) 30/391 70 05 Gniglerstraße 54
E-mail: [email protected] A-5020 Salzburg
Internet: www.alre.de Phone: +43 (0) 662/87 00 53
Fax: +43 (0) 662/87 00 53 20
Manager Marketing & Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Klaus Lorenz Internet: www.eh-technik.at
Phone: +49 (0) 30 399 84 -214
Fax: +49 (0) 30 391 70 05 Representation Switzerland
E-mail: [email protected] Bachofen AG
Ackerstraße 42
Office CH-9610 Uster
Indoor Service Phone: +41 (44) 944 11 11
Phone: +49 (0) 30/399 84 -214 Fax: +41 (44) 944 12 33
Fax: +49 (0) 30/ 391 70 05 E-mail: [email protected]
E-mail: [email protected] Internet: www.bachofen.ch

Exports Representation United Kingdom


Ingo Möller Brian Tonge Agencies Ltd.
Phone: +49 (0) 30 / 399 84 -121 Allington House
Fax: +49 (0) 30 / 391 70 05 Rock Lane
E-mail: [email protected] Farnham
Indoor Service Surrey GU10 4SY
Phone: +49 (0) 30/399 84 -213 England
Fax: +49 (0) 30/ 391 70 05 E-mail: [email protected]
E-mail: [email protected] Phone: +44 (0) 1252 793876
Fax: +44 (0) 1252 793273

Miscellaneous
Catalogue 2007 | Page 175
Overview:
Heating Technology
Room temperature controllers / Page 8 – Page 18
Continuous-action controllers

Floor temperature controllers Page 19 – Page 22

Clock controlled thermostats Page 23 – Page 28

Radio control (N E W) Page 29 – Page 33

Air Conditioning Technology


Climate controllers Page 38 – Page 41

Cooling ceiling controllers Page 42 – Page 44

Dew point monitoring Page 45 – Page 46

Hygrostats / hygrothermostats Page 48 – Page 51

Industrial Technology
Capillary- and frost protection thermostats Page 56 – Page 76

Temperature controllers, mechanical / Page 77 – Page 85


electronic

Digital controllers / digital displays Page 86 – Page 89

Flow- / pressure monitoring Page 90 – Page 96

Sensors
Temperature Page 100 – Page 137

Airflow / pressure / differential pressure Page 138 – Page 142

Motion / brightness / air quality Page 143 – Page 146

Humidity Page 147 – Page 150

Miscellaneous
Accessories Page 154 – Page 160
+
Technical annex / type comparison old / new Page 161 – Page 166
I
Table of contents Page 167 – Page 172
2
@ General / contact / adresses Page 173 – Page 175

Catalogue 2007 | Page 


Catalogue 2007 | Page 
Heating Technology
Heating Technology
Heating technology overview:

Heating Technology
Room temperature controllers / Continuous-action controllers
Bimetal controllers for super flat surface installation Page 8

Bimetal controllers for surface installation and installation Page 9 – Page 11


in switch cabinets

Bimetal controllers for flush installation Page 12 – Page 14

Fully packaged bimetal controllers Page 15

Electronic continuous-action controllers for surface installation Page 16 – Page 18

Floor temperature controllers


For surface installation Page 19 – Page 20

For flush installation Page 21 – Page 22

Clock controlled thermostats


for room heating systems
Digital clock for flush installation Page 23

Digital clock for flush installation Page 24

Electric floor heating systems / Tiled stove heating systems


Digital analogue clock for surface installation Page 25 – Page 26

Digital clock for flush installation Page 27 – Page 28

Radio control (NEW)


Transmitters Page 29 – Page 31

Receivers Page 32 – Page 33

Tabular overview of types Page 34

Catalogue 2007 | Page 7


Bimetal room temperature controllers
for ”super flat” surface installation – Design Berlin 1000
NEW
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 250 V ~ / 50 / 60 Hz Control or supervision of tempera-
Sensor: bimetal tures in closed rooms.
Switching current: see circuit diagram Valve: normally closed type. Nor-
Setting ranges: 5 … 30°C, others on request mally open heating valves must, if
Switching difference: approx. 0.5 K existing, be connected to the cooling
outlet of the changeover contact.
Temperature decrease: approx. 4 K
Up to max. 10 valve actuators can
Degree of protection: IP 30 be connected to the break- and up
Protection class: II, after according installation to 5 actuators to the changeover
General equipment: thermal recirculation contact (regarding thereto, also
mechanical range suppression please pay regard to the switching
capacity information in the corre-
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 % r. H., non condensing sponding ”circuit diagram”).
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C
Radio interference suppression: EN 60730 The installation on an UP box is
recommended on account of the
Ambient temperature: 0 … 30°C restricted wiring space inside of the
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 device. The controller can never-
Housing material: plastic (ABS) theless be mounted on an even,
non-conductible surface.
Mounting / installation: surface / wall installation
(4 hole fixing on UP box)
See also ”Technical terms”
Weight: approx. 55 g (as of page 164).
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Circuit diagram PG

RTBSB-201.000 MA 300000 Break contact A


New

RTBSB-201.002 MA 300100 Break contact, A


New temperature decrease function

RTBSB-201.010 MA 300200 Changeover contact A


New

RTBSB-201.023 MA 300300 Break contact, A


New temperature decrease function,
ON / OFF switch

RTBSB-201.062 MA 300400 Break contact, A


New temperature decrease function,
ON / OFF switch,
heating indicator lamp

Catalogue 2007 | Page 8


Bimetal room temperature controllers

Heating Technology
For surface installation – Design Berlin 2000
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 250 V ~; 24 V ~ / 50 / 60 Hz Control or supervision of tempe-
Sensor: bimetal ratures in closed rooms. Suited
for all types of heating systems.
Switching current: see circuit diagram
Setting ranges: 5 … 30°C; 10 … 60°C; – 20 … + 30°C Valve: normally closed type. Nor-
Switching difference: approx. 0.5 K mally open heating valves must,
Temperature decrease: approx. 4 K if existing, be connected to the
cooling outlet of the changeover
Degree of protection: IP 30
contact.
Protection class: II, after according installation
General equipment: thermal recirculation, Up to 10 valve actuators can be
mechanical range suppression connected (break contact) and
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 % r. H., non condensing up to 5 actuators to the change-
over contact (regarding thereto,
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C
also please pay regard to the
Radio interference suppression: EN 60730 switching capacity information in
Ambient temperature: 0 … 30°C, 10 … 60°C, – 20 … + 30°C the ”circuit diagram”).
(depending on the temperature range)
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 Specially suited for use with
switch cabinets, see type PTR
Housing material: plastic (ABS)
01.082
Mounting / installation: surface / wall installation
(4 hole fixing on an UP box) Other climate controllers
Weight: approx. 90 g as of page 37.
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Circuit diagram PG

RTBSB-001.000 MA 010000 Break contact, 5 … 30°C A

Replaces
PTR 01.000

RTBSB-001.002 MA 010100 Break contact, 5 … 30°C, A


temperature decrease function
Replaces
PTR 01.002

RTBSB-001.010 MA 010200 Changeover contact, A


5 … 30°C
Replaces
PTR 01.010

RTBSB-001.026 MA 010900 Changeover contact, A


5 … 30°C, ON / OFF switch,
Replaces permanently operated fan
PTR 01.025 / 026 / 054

RTBSB-001.045 MA 011200 Changeover contact, A


– 20 … + 30°C
Replaces
PTR 01.045

Catalogue 2007 | Page 9


Bimetal room temperature controllers
For surface installation – Design Berlin 2000

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Circuit diagram PG

RTBSB-001.048 MA 011300 Changeover contact, A


10 … 60°C
Replaces
PTR 01.048

RTBSB-001.050 MA 011400 Break contact, 5 … 30°C, A


ON / OFF switch, indicator
Replaces lamp, switch / indicator lamp
PTR 01.050 ”additional heating”

RTBSB-001.062 MA 012400 Break contact, 5 … 30°C, A


New ON / OFF switch,
temperature decrease function,
Replaces heating indicator lamp
PTR 01.034 / 073 / 074

RTBSB-001.065 MA 010600 Changeover contact, 5 … 30°C, A


heating/cooling switch
Replaces Climate controller for use
PTR 01.065 with 2-pipe systems,
especially heat pumps

RTBSB-001.075 MA 010500 Changeover contact, 5 … 30°C, A


triple switch ”temperature de-
Replaces crease / heating / temperature
PTR 01.075 decrease via external timer”,
temperature decrease mode
indicator lamp

RTBSB-001.086 MA 010800 Break contact, 5 … 30°C, A


numeric scale 1… 6, switching
capacity 3000 Watt, for use
with direct electrical heating sy-
stems, such as marble heating
systems and others.
Precursor model PTR 01.086 +
plug-in socket (see page 15)

RTBSB-001.096 MA 012500 Break contact, 5 … 30°C, A


New numeric scale 1… 6, switching
capacity 3000 Watt, heating
indicator lamp.
Suited for use with electrically
operated direct-heatings, such
as marble heatings and others.

RTBSB-001.202 MA 011700 Break contact, 5 … 30°C, A


Replaces temperature decrease function,
PTR 01.202 24 V ~

RTBSB-001.910 MA 012000 Changeover contact, A


Replaces temperature decrease function,
PTR 01.902 internal setting
PTR 01.910

Catalogue 2007 | Page 10


Bimetal room temperature controllers

Heating Technology
For surface installation – Design Berlin 2000

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Circuit diagram PG

RTBSB-001.948 / 1 MA 012600 Changeover contact, A


Replaces internal setting, 10 … 60°C,
PTR 01.910 / 2 (24 V) 230 V ~ / 24 V ~
PTR 01.948 / 1

Specially suited for the installation in switch cabinets (design Pikolo).


For the protection of electrical and electronic components against heat, cold and moisture.

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Circuit diagram PG

PTR 01.082 A 201302 Changeover contact, 230 V ~, A


heating 10 (4) A, cooling 5 (2) A,
10 … 60°C, switching difference
approx. 2 K, installation on
DIN rail

RTBSB PTR 01.082

Catalogue 2007 | Page 11


Bimetal room temperature controllers
For flush installation – Design Berlin UP
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 250 V ~ / 50 / 60 Hz Control and supervision of tem-
Sensor: bimetal peratures in closed, dry rooms.
Suited for all types of heating
Switching current:
systems.
Break contact 10 (4) A, VDE see circuit diagram
Changeover contact 5 (2) A, VDE see circuit diagram
Valve: normally closed type.
at 24 V AC / DC: 1 (1) A Normally open heating valves
Setting ranges: 5 … 30°C (note numeral scale* … 6) must, if existing, be connected
Switching difference: approx. 0.5 K to the cooling outlet of the
changeover contact., e.g.
Temperature decrease: approx. 4 K
FTR 101.010.
Degree of protection: IP 30
Protection class: II, after according installation Up to max. 10 valve actuators can
General equipment: thermal recirculation, be connected to the break – and
mechanical range suppression up to 5 actuators to the change-
over contact.
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 % r. H., non condensing
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C Cover set available
Radio interference suppression: EN 60730 in RAL 1013!
Ambient temperature: 0 … 30 ˚ C (see page 14)
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010
Available only in packaging
housing cover brilliant (optional:
units of 16 pieces.
matt #02)
Colour set accessory: cream while, similar to RAL 1013 See also ”Technical terms”
Housing material: polycarbonate (PC) (as of page 164).
Mounting / installation: in an UP box (Ø 55 mm) – can be
adapted to almost all currently
available flush switch frame systems
when using DIN 49075 compliant
intermediate frames (current over-
view available on request)
Weight: approx. 115 g
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Circuit diagram PG

FTR 101.000 #21 UA 010012 Break contact M

FTR 101.002 #21 UA 010115 Break contact, M


temperature decrease function

FTR 101.010 #21 UA 010207 Changeover contact, M


temperature decrease function

FTR 101.062 #21 UN 010800 Break contact, temperature decrease M


New function, ON / OFF switch,
heating indicator lamp

Catalogue 2007 | Page 12


Bimetal room temperature controllers

Heating Technology
Flush installation type – Design Berlin UP

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Circuit diagram PG

FTR 101.065 #21 UN 010900 Changeover contact, ”heating / cooling” M


New switch
Climate controller for 2-pipe
systems, especially heat pumps

FTR 101.073 #21 UA 010312 Break contact, temperature decrease M


function, ON / OFF switch and lamp

FTR 101.075 #21 UA 010408 Break contact, triple switch ”temperature M


decrease / heating / temperature decrease
via external switch clock”,
temperature decrease mode indicator lamp

FTR 101.086 #21 UA 010608 Break contact, switching capacity 3000 M


Watt, for direct electrical heating systems,
such as marble heating systems and
others.

Note: model variant with heating indicator


lamp currently in preparation

FTR 101.202 #21 UA 012001 Break contact, temperature decrease M


New function, 24 V ~

Delivery possible also in the following conditions:

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Notes PG

FTR 101.xxx #02 acc. to type Controller FTR 101.xxx #21, same model as For integration into existing switch M
above, but without frame, housing cover design lines
50 x 50, matt, RAL 9010

FTR 101.xxx #07 acc. to type Controller FTR 101.xxx #21, same model as For integration into existing switch M
above, but without frame, housing cover design lines
50 x 50, bright, RAL 9010

FTR 101.xxx #09 acc. to type Controller FTR 101.xxx #21, same model as For integration into existing switch M
above, but without frame, housing cover design lines
50 x 50, bright, RAL 1013

Catalogue 2007 | Page 1


Bimetal room temperature controller
For flush installation – Design Berlin UP

Accessories for conversion to colour RAL 1013

Type Item No. Equipment Notes PG

Cover set RAL 1013 Set 4 – VV 000007 for FTR 101.000, .002, .010, .086, .202 For conversion to white RAL 1013 M
Set 5 – VV 000008 for FTR 101.062, .073 (cream white, electrowhite, M
Set 6 – VV 000009 for FTR 101.075 pearl white) M
(consisting of brilliant housing cover,
button, cover screw and switch rocker
(if applicable) and optical waveguide)
Frame set RAL 1013 Set 7 – VV 000010 suited for FTR, FETR, FDTR-U, For controllers provided for individual M
all models flush installation in RAL 1013,
germane to all switch ranges in the
same colour

with intermediate frame with ALRE standard frame

Examples of the integration into different switch lines via intermediate frames

Catalogue 2007 | Page 1


Bimetal room temperature controller

Heating Technology
For surface installation or as fully packaged device – Design Pikolo
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 250 V ~ / 50 / 60 Hz Control of the temperatures in
Sensor: bimetal rooms heated by radiators, closed
fireplaces, direct electrical heating
Switching capacity: 3000 Watt
systems, marble heating systems,
Break contact
etc.
Setting ranges: 5 … 30°C (note numeral scale 1 … 6)
Switching difference: approx. 1 K Caution! If connecting loads
Degree of protection: IP 30 of more than 2300 Watt, care
must be taken to ensure that
Protection class: II (protection class I and II compliant
the wall socket is dimensi-
consumers)
oned for 16 A (fire hazard).
General equipment: mechanical range suppression
(except PTR01.401)
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 % r. h., non condensing
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C
Radio interference suppression: EN 60730
Ambient temperature: 0 … 30°C
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010
Housing material: plastic (ABS)
Mounting / installation: wall mounting or ready for plug in
Weight: approx. 330 g (PTR 01.4 … )

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Circuit diagram PG

PTR 01.401 A 201200 Cable, 1.5 m long, with Schuko adapter plug. fully packaged A
Controller suited for permanent installation or for
wall suspension by means of a special adapter
plate (2-hole fixing, drilling jig included in the
scope of the delivery).
On request also available with special plug
for Switzerland (PTR 01.402 CH).
PTR 01.411 A 201121 Cable, 1.5 m long, with Schuko coupling. fully packaged A
A preassembled plug-in socket enables to plug
the controller directly into the wall socket.

XA-PTR 2-14 A 109404 Plug in socket (as with PTR 01.411), completely fully packaged or installation A
prewired (see drawing below), can be completed with room thermostat PTR 01.086,
with room thermostat PTR 01.086. see below

PTR 01.086 A 201080 Break contact, numeric scale 1… 6, A


switching capacity 3000 Watt.
For direct electrical heating systems, such as
marble heating systems and others.

PTR 01.411 XA-PTR 2-14

Catalogue 2007 | Page 15


Electronic continuous-action controller
For surface installation – Design Berlin 2000
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: Sensor: 24 V~ / = approx. 1 VA Room temperature controller for
safety extra low voltage the permanent valve drives.
Sensor: internal – NTC 47 kΩ Controller for the control of
(type KTRVB-042.207 for external 2-pipe systems (1 conduit),
NTC 47 kΩ) 4-pipe systems (2 conduits)
and mixing chambers.
Setting ranges: 5 … 30°C; 21° ± 8°C;
(see ”Equipment”)
Proportional band: 0.5 … 3 K (see ”Equipment”)
Degree of protection: IP 30
Protection class: III
General equipment: mechanical range suppression
Indication (LED): with model KTRVB-042.206 only
Switch: see ”Equipment”
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 %, non condensing
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C
Radio interference suppression: acc. to EN 60730
Ambient temperature: 0 … 50°C
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010
Housing material: plastic (ABS)
Mounting / installation: surface / wall installation
Weight: approx. 130 g / sensor approx. 160 g
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Equipment Circuit diagram PG

KTRVB-048.100 Setting range: 5 … 30°C A


Output: Analogue output 0 … 10 V or 10 … 0 V,
Art.-Nr. DA 450000 repluggable, 5 mA, adjusted to 5 V (at set temperature)
Inputs: Internal sensor NTC 47 k Ω
Indications: Set value scale 5 … 30°C
Functions: Heating and cooling with adjustable p-band
Adjustments: P-Band + 0.5 … + 3 K (factory setting: 2 K)
Application: Control of climates in mixing chambers
by means of a proportionally actuated valve.
Replaces
PETA 75.500
KTRVB-048.200 Setting range (turning knob): 21°C ± 3 K The factory preset A
”zero” (21°C) can be changed internally by ± 5 K
Art.-Nr. DA 450100 Outputs: Analogue output 0 … 10 V or 10 … 0 V,
repluggable, 5 mA, adjusted to 5 V (at set temperature)
Inputs: Internal sensor NTC 47 k Ω
Indications: Relative scale (set value 21°C with ”0” marking and
swelling arrow (”+” and ”–” for warmer / colder)
Functions: Heating and cooling with adjustable p-band
Adjustments: P-Band 0.5 … 3 K (factory setting: 2 K)
Replaces Application: Control of climates in mixing chambers
PETA 75.502 by means of a proportionally actuated valve.
KTRVB-042.100 Setting range: 5 … 30°C A
Outputs:
Art.-Nr. DA 451000 Analogue heating output (0 … 10 V oder 10 … 0 V), repluggable, 5 mA
Analogue cooling output (0 … 10 V oder 10 … 0 V), repluggable, 5 mA
Inputs: Internal sensor NTC 47 k Ω
Indications: Set value scale 5 … 30°C
Functions: Heating and cooling with adjustable neutral zone and
adjustable p-band
Adjustments: Neutral zone – 1 … + 5 K (factory setting: 1 K)
Replaces P-band ”heating” 0.5 ... 3 K (factory setting: 1 K)
PETA 75.800 P-band ”cooling” 0.5 ... 3 K (factory setting: 2 K)
PETA 75.803 Application: Control of climates in individual rooms, the conditio-
ning of which is realised via 2-conduit systems (4-pipe systems)
and proportionally actuated valves.

Catalogue 2007 | Page 16


Electronic continuous-action controllers

Heating Technology
For surface installation – Design Berlin 2000

Model / Picture Equipment Circuit diagram PG

KTRVB-042.205 Setting range (turning knob): 21°C ± 3 K, the factory preset ”zero” A
(21°C) can be changed internally by ± 5 K.
Art.-Nr. DA 451200 Outputs:
Analogue heating output 0 … 10 V or 10 … 0 V, repluggable, 5 mA,
Analogue cooling output 0 … 10 V or 10 … 0 V, repluggable, 5 mA
Inlets:
Internal sensor (NTC 47 k Ω), ECO contact, forced switch off contact
Indications: Relative scale (set value 21°C with ”0” marking,
swelling arrows (”+” and ”–” for warmer / colder)
Functions: Heating and cooling with adjustable neutral zone and
Replaces adjustable p-band. ECO mode operation can be activated via an
PETA 75.805 external contact (= neutral zone broadened through ECO zone).
Forced switch off function (frost protection monitoring of rooms at
approx. 5°C)
Adjustments: Neutral zone from – 1 … + 5 K, (factory setting 1 K),
p-band heating 0.5 … 3 K (factory setting 1 K),
p-band cooling 0.5 … 3 K (factory setting 2 K)
Application: Control of climates in individual rooms, the conditioning
of which is realised via 2-conduit systems (4-pipe systems) and
proportionally actuated valves.
KTRVB-042.206 Setting range (turning knob): 21°C ± 3 K, the factory preset ”zero” A
(21°C) can be changed internally by ± 5 K.
Art.-Nr. DA 451300 Outputs:
Analogue heating output 0 … 10 V or 10 … 0 V, repluggable, 5 mA
Analogue cooling output 0 … 10 V or 10 … 0 V, repluggable, 5 mA
Inputs: Internal sensor (NTC 47 k Ω), ECO contact, forced switch off
contact (prevalent as against the switch)
Indications: Relative scale (set value 21°C with ”0” marking, swelling
arrows (”+” and ”–” for warmer / colder), yellow LED indicator for
“ON” and green LED indicator for ”ECO”
Replaces Functions: Heating and cooling with adjustable neutral zone and
PETA 75.815 adjustable band. ECO mode can be activated via external contact or
switch (= neutral zone broadened by the ECO zone). Forced switch
off function (frost protection monitoring of rooms at approx. 5°C).
Switch: ”Off (forced switch off = room frost protection) / Day / ECO”
Adjustments: Neutral zone – 1 … + 5 K (factory setting 1 K)
ECO-Zone 1 … 5 K (factory setting 3 K)
p-band heating 0.5 … 3 K (factory setting 1 K)
p-band cooling 0.5 … 3 K (factory setting 2 K)
Application: Control of climates in individual rooms, the conditioning
of which is realised via 2-conduit systems (4-pipe systems) and
proportionally actuated valves.
KTRVB-042.207 Setting range (turning knob): 21°C ± 3 K, the factory preset ”zero” A
(21°C) can be adjusted internally by ± 5 K.
Art.-Nr. DA 451400 Outlets:
Analogue heating output 0 … 10 V oder 10 … 0 V, repluggable, 5 mA,
Analogue cooling output 0 … 10 V oder 10 … 0 V, repluggable, 5 mA
Inputs: External Sensor NTC 47 k Ω
Indications: Relative scale (set value 21°C with ”0” marking,
swelling arrows (”+” and ”–” for warmer / colder)
Functions: Heating and cooling with adjustable neutral zone and
adjustable p-band
Replaces Adjustments: Neutral zone – 1 … + 5 K (factory setting 1 K)
PETA 75.833 p-band heating 0.5 … 3 K (factory setting 1 K)
p-band cooling 0.5 … 3 K (factory setting 2 K)
Application: Control of climates in individual rooms, the conditioning
of which is realised via 2-conduit systems (4-pipe systems) and
proportionally actuated valves.
Sensor LF-22 must be ordered seperately; other sensors of the
2 / 22 type series (e.g. RF-2, HF-2) can be applied too (regarding
sensors, see page 99)

Catalogue 2007 | Page 17


Electronic continuous-action controller
For surface installation – Design Berlin 2000

Model / Picture Equipment Circuit diagram PG

KTRVB-040.209 Setting range (turning knob): 21°C ± 3 K, the factory preset A


”zero” (21°C) can be changed internally by ± 5 K.
Art.-Nr. Outputs: Analogue heating or cooling output 0 … 10 V
DA 452200 or 10 … 0 V, repluggable, 5 mA, changeover between heating /
cooling operation by means of a switch
Inputs: Internal sensor (NTC 47 k Ω)
Indications: Relative scale (set value 21°C with ”0” marking,
swelling arrows (”+” and ”–” for warmer / colder)
Functions: Heating or cooling with adjustable p-band
Adjustments: p-band heating or cooling + 0.5 … + 3 K
(factory setting 1 K)
Application: Control of climates in individual rooms, the
Replaces
conditioning of which is realised via 1-conduit systems (2-pipe
PETA 75.910
systems) and a proportionally actuated valve.

Catalogue 2007 | Page 18


Heating Technology
Electronic temperature controller with remote sensor
(for floor, wall and ceiling heating systems and tiled stoves)
For surface installation – Design Berlin 2000
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 230 V~, 50 Hz Control of temperatures produced
Sensor (self-monitoring): remote sensor – included in the by heating systems, e.g. electrical
scope of the delivery systems for the heating of floors,
fringe zones, bathrooms, ceilings
Switching capacity: 16 (2) A, 250 V
tiled stoves, marble and/or wall
Switching contact: relay (make contact) not potential- heating systems or tempering
free (heating) systems.
Switch: ON / OFF (without frost protection)
Setting ranges: 10 … 60°C, 20 … 80°C with Regarding clock controlled thermo-
mechanical range suppression stats for floor heating systems, see
page 25.
Switching difference: 1K
Degree of protection: IP 30 Regarding temperature controllers
Protection class: II, after according installation for floor heating systems that suit
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 %, non condensing for the installation in distribution
switchboards (ITR 79), see page 79.
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C
Radio interference suppression: acc. EN 60730 Note: The sensor line must be laid
Ambient temperature: at 16 A: 0 … 35°C inside the protecting tube. Parallel
at 10 A: 0 … 55°C laying with power cables is prohi-
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 bited.
Housing material: plastic (ABS)
Sensor breakdown and deactivation of the heating
short-circuit protection:
Mounting / installation: surface installation / wall mounting
Weight: approx. 350 g (incl. sensor 160 g)
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Sensor Circuit diagram PG

HTRRB-011.010 DA 400000 Floor temperature controller: external (sensor A


Setting range 10 … 60°C HF-8 / 4-K2
Replaces (scale ”1 … 6”), red LED included in the
PETR ”heating” scope of the
01.725 delivery)

HTRRB-011.410 DA 400100 Tiled stove surface temperature external (sensor A


controller: HF-5 / 4-K3
Replaces Setting range 20 … 80°C included in the
PETR (scale in °C), red LED scope of the
01.825 “heating” delivery)

Accessories PG

HF-8 / 4-K2 G 8000370 Spare sensor for HTRRB 011.010 S


(formerly PETR 01.725)
incl. 4 m cable, (sensor acc. to
DIN 44574), Ø 7.7 mm

HF-5 / 4-K3 D 4771304 Spare sensor for HTRRB 011.410 S


(formerly PETR 01.825)
incl. 4 m silicone cable, Ø 8.9 mm

THF C 1809515 Sleeve (inside Ø 8 mm) for the K


protection of the sensor when
installing it into floor pavements
(for HF-8 / 4-K2 only)

Catalogue 2007 | Page 19


Electronic temperature controller with remote sensor
(for floor, wall and ceiling heating systems and tiled stoves)
For surface installation - Design Berlin 2000
THF

HF-8 / 4-K2 HF-5 / 4-K3

Catalogue 2007 | Page 20


Electronic temperature controller with remote sensor

Heating Technology
(for floor, wall and ceiling heating systems)
For flush installation – Design Berlin UP
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 230 V / 50 Hz Control of temperatures produced
Sensor (self-monitoring): external or internal + external (monitor) by heating systems, e.g. electrical
systems for the heating of floors,
Switching capacity: 16 (2) A (101.715) bzw. 10 (1,5) A
fringe zones, bathrooms, ceilings,
(101.745) / 230 V~
tiled stoves, marble and/or wall hea-
Switching contact: relay / make contact ting systems or tempering systems.
Setting ranges: 10 … 50°C (floor,), 5 … 30°C (room),
with mechanical range suppression Temperature decrease function: The-
Switching difference: <1K se flush mounted controller models
enable to decrease the temperature
Temperature decrease: approx. 5 K permanently
by 5 K. To do so, an external master
(connection L1 )
controller or an external switch clock
ndicators (LEDs): heating (red) and decrease (green) needs to be applied that connects the
Degree of protection: IP 30 potential L1 to the terminal .
Protection class: II, after according installation
Regarding clock controlled thermo-
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 %, non condensing
stats for floor heating systems, see
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C page 25.
Radio interference suppres- acc. to EN 60730
sion: Regarding temperature controllers for
Ambient temperature: 0 … 40°C (101.715) or 0 … 30°C floor heating systems that suit for the
(101.745) installation in distribution switch-
boards (ITR 79), see page 79.
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010
housing cover bright / optional
Note: The sensor line must be laid
matt #02
inside the protecting tube. Parallel
cover set RAL 1013 (optional)
laying with power cables is prohibi-
Housing material: polycarbonate (PC) ted.
Sensor breakdown and deactivation of the heating
short-circuit protection:
Sensor extension: up to 50 m with 0.5 mm2, with double-
insulation only
Mounting / installation: in Ø 55 mm UP box – can be adapted
to almost all currently available flush
switch frame systems when using DIN
49075 compliant intermediate frames
(current overview available on request)
Weight: approx. 350 g (incl. sensor (160 g)
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Sensor Circuit diagram PG

FETR 101.715 #21 UA 030110 Floor temperature controller: external A


With remote sensor (4 m, (sensor
DIN 44574) for floor temperature HF-8 / 4-K2
range 10 … 50°C included in
(scale: 1 … 5) the scope of
the delivery)

FETR 101.745 #21 UA 030406 Room temperature controller internal + A


with floor monitor: external
With internal NTC room sensor, (sensor
range 5 … 30°C (scale 2 3 • 5 HF-8 / 4-K2
6) and remote sensor (4 m, DIN included in
44574) for the limitation of the floor the scope of
temperature (internal scale the delivery)
20 … 60°C)

Accessories Item No. Equipment Notes PG

Cover set, RAL 1013 Set 9 - for FETR 101.715 (consisting of For conversion to colour RAL 1013 M
VV 000012 bright housing cover, button, cover (cream white, electrowhite,
screw and, if need be, switch rocker pearl white)
and optical wageguide)
Frame set, RAL 1013 Set 7 - for all models of the FTR, FETR, For controllers provided for indivi- M
VV 000010 FDTR-U series dual flush installation in RAL 1013,
germane to all switch ranges in the
same colour.

Catalogue 2007 | Page 21


Electronic temperature controller with remote sensor
(for floor, wall and ceiling heating systems)
For flush installation - Design Berlin UP

Accessories Item No. Equipment Notes PG

HF-8 / 4-K2 G 8000370 Spare sensor for FETR 101.7xx S


incl. 4 m cable (sensor acc. to
DIN 44574), Ø 7.7 mm

THF C 1809515 Sleeve (inside Ø 8 mm) for the K


protection of the sensor when
installing it into floor pavements
(for HF-8 / 4-K2 only)

FETR HF THF

with ALRE standard frame with intermediate frame

Catalogue 2007 | Page 22


Clock controlled electronic thermostat
NEW

Heating Technology
For surface installation – Design Berlin 3000
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 230V / 50 Hz For the time-dependent control
Sensor: NTC – internal of temperatures in closed rooms.
Suited for all kinds of heating
Switching capacity: 13 (2) A / 230 V ~
systems.
Switching contact: relay / make contact
Setting ranges: 5 … 30°C (scale in °C) Valve: normally closed type.
Switching difference: <1 K
The device can also be used as
Temperature decrease: adjustable 5 … 29°C
master controller that enables to
(factory setting 17°C)
trigger the temperature decrease
Degree of protection: IP 30 operations of other controllers
Protection class: II, after according installation (slaves). The controller models
General equipment: mechanical range suppression, of the FETR, FTR and RTBSB
summer- / winter time changeover, series are particularly suitable for
child protection / valve protection this purpose (operation as slave
symbol display with 9 direct select controllers).
keys / °C or °F (Fahrenheit)
Programming mode known
Indications: symbol display with 9 direct select
from mechanical switch clocks:
keys / °C or °F (Fahrenheit)
programming enabled for each
4 days day individually by means of so-
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 %, non condensing called ”electronic stops”. Lowest
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C switching time: 15 min.
Radio interference suppression: acc. to EN 60730
Ambient temperature: 0 … 30°C
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010
Housing material: plastic (ABS)
Mounting / installation: surface installation / wall mounting
Weight: approx. 250 g
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Circuit diagram PG

HTRRBu-110.117 MA 600000 Room temperature controller with clock: A


New Simplest operation through direct select keys for
Replaces all ON / OFF, holiday mode setting, party mode setting and
models of the the setting of the desired operating mode and for the
MTRU series calling of information pertaining to all actual settings.
(break contact, Temperature setting knob with °C scale and self-learning
230 V) function (can be deactivated).

HTRRBu-110.121 MA 600300 Room temperature controller with clock A


New and backlight: Identical with HTRRBu-110.117,
Replaces all but with additional backlight.
models of the
MTRU series
(break contact,
230 V)

JZ-17 MN 990001 Adapter plate for installation on an UP box (incl. fixing K


New screws for the installation of the HTRRBu on the adap-
ter plate)

JZ-17

Catalogue 2007 | Page 2


Clock controlled electronic thermostats
For flush installation – Design Berlin UP
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 230 V ~/ 50 Hz Flush mounted controller for the
Sensor (self-monitoring): NTC – internal time-dependent control of tem-
peratures developed by electric
Switching capacity: 8 (1) A / 230 V ~
and warm water heating systems
Switching contact: relay / make contact (normally closed actuators).
Setting range: 5 … 30°C (scale in °C) This clock controlled thermostat is
Switching difference: <1K equipped with a week-cycle clock
and 3 individually adjustable pro-
Temperature decrease: adjustable (5 … 29°C)
grams (factory preset to ”normal”
(factory setting 17°C)
day sequences).
Indications: on the display, see below The device can also be used as
Degree of protection: IP 30 master controller that enables to
Protection class: II, after according installation trigger the temperature decrease
operations of other controllers
Power reserve: 4 days
(slaves). The controller models
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 %, non condensing of the FETR, FTR and RTBSB
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C series are particularly suitable for
Radio interference suppression: acc. to EN 60730 this purpose (operation as slave
controllers).
Ambient temperature: 0 … 30°C
Self-learning function: Autono-
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 mous adaptation of the controller
Colour set accessory: cream white, similar to RAL 1013 to the heating time start. Objective:
Housing material: polycarbonate (PC) Attaining of the comfort tem-
perature at the adjusted time.
Mounting / installation: in Ø 55 mm UP box – can be adap-
The device is delivered with the
ted to almost all currently available
self-learning function in activated
flush switch frame systems when
condition. The self-learning func-
using DIN 49075 compliant inter-
tion can also be deactivated.
mediate frames (current overview
OFF function: This function puts
available on request)
the frost protection function out of
Weight: approx. 160 g service.
Electrical connections terminal screws

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Circuit diagram PG

FDTR-U 101.000 UA 051008 Room temperature controller with A


SL / OFF #21 clock: Self-learning function (can be
deactivated)
Frost protection function (rendered
active when underrunning a temperature
level of approx. 7°C)
Valve protection: Active for 5 min. per
week
Indication: Actual value / time alternately
(factory setting) Actual value or time per-
manently (adjustable via the menu)

Accessories Item No. Equipment Notes PG

Cover set RAL 1013 Set 8 - for FDTR-U xxx (for frame set For conversion to colour RAL 1013 M
VV 000011 see page 14 at FTR) (cream white, electrowhite, pearl white)
For examples of the integration into different switch lines, see page 14.

Catalogue 2007 | Page 2


Clock controlled electronic thermostat with remote sensor

Heating Technology
(for floor, wall and ceiling heating systems)
For surface installation – Design Berlin 3000 NEW
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 230 V / 50 Hz Time-dependent control of tempera-
Sensor: external, 2K NTC tures produced by heating systems,
e.g. electrical systems for the heating
Switching capacity: 13 (2) A / 230 V~
of floors, of fringe zones, bathrooms,
Switching contact: relay / make contact ceilings, tiled stoves, marble and/or
Setting ranges: see equipment wall heating systems or tempering
Switching difference: 1K systems.
The device can also be used as ma-
Temperature decrease: adjustable (as for factory setting
ster controller that enables to trigger
see ”Equipment”)
the temperature decrease operations
Degree of protection: IP 30 of other controllers (slaves). The con-
Protection class: II, after according installation troller models of the FETR, FTR and
General equipment: mechanical range suppression, RTBSB series are particularly suitable
summer- / winter time changeover, for this purpose (operation as slave
child protection / valve protection controllers).
Note: The sensor line must be laid
Indications: symbol display with 9 direct
inside the protecting tube. Parallel la-
select keys
ying with power cables is prohibited.
Power reserve: 4 days Self-learning function: Autonomous
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 %, non condensing adaptation of the controller to the he-
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C ating time start. Objective: Attaining
of the comfort temperature at the
Radio interference acc. to EN 60730
adjusted time. The device is delivered
suppression:
with the self-learning function in
Ambient temperature: 0 … 30°C activated condition. The self-learning
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 function can also be deactivated.
Housing material: plastic (ABS) OFF function: This function puts
the frost protection function out of
Sensor breakdown and emergency operation 30 %
service.
short-circuit protection: (monitor: deactivation of the heating)
Programming mode known from
Sensor extension: up to 50 m with 0.5 mm2 with double- mechanical switch clocks: pro-
insulation only gramming enabled for each day
Mounting / installation: Surface installation / wall mounting individually by means of so-called
Weight: approx. 450 g “electronic stops”. Lowest swit-
(including sensor, 160 g) ching time: 15 min.
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Sensor Circuit diagram PG

HTRRBu-110.017 MA 600100 Floor temperature controller with external A


New clock: External NTC remote sensor, (sensor HF-8 / 4-K2
(4 m, DIN 44574) for floor tempe- included in the scope
ra-tures 10 … 40°C (scale 1 … 4), of the delivery)
Temperature decrease function
(adjustable, factory setting 18°C)
can be triggered by the clock or by
the related operating mode. Simplest
operation due to direct select keys
Replaces for ON / OFF, party setting, party
METRU 01.725 mode setting and the setting of the
desired operating mode and for the
calling of information pertaining to
all actual settings. Setting knob with
°C scale,
self-learning function (can be deac-
tivated).
Display indication: time and symbols
according to adjustment.
HTRRBu-110.021 MA 600400 Floor temperature controller with external A
New clock and backlight: (sensor HF-8 / 4-K2
Identical with HTRRBu-110.017, included in the scope of
but with additional backlight. the delivery)

Catalogue 2007 | Page 25


Clock controlled electronic thermostat with remote sensor
(for floor, wall and ceiling heating systems)
For surface installation - Design Berlin 3000 NEW
Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Sensor Circuit diagram PG

HTRRBu-110.122 MA 600200 Room temperature controller with floor internal and A


New temperature monitoring function and external
clock: Internal NTC room sensor 5 … 30°C) (sensor HF-8 /
and remote sensor (4 m, DIN 44574) for the 4-K2 included
limitation of the floor temperature (internal in the scope of
scale 5 … 40°C). Temperature decrease the delivery)
function (adjustable, factory setting 17°C),
can be triggered by the clock or by the
related operating mode. Simplest operation
due to direct select keys for ON / OFF, party
setting, party mode setting and the setting
of the desired operating mode and for the
calling of information pertaining to all actual
settings. Setting knob with °C scale, self-
learning function (can be deactivated).

Display indication: in °C or °F (Fahrenheit) or


time and symbols according to adjustment.
HTRRBu-110.123 MA 600500 Room temperature controller with floor internal and A
monitoring function, clock and backlight: external
Identical with HTRRBu-110.122, but with (sensor HF-8 /
additional backlight 4-K2 included
in the scope of
the delivery)

JZ-17 MN 990001 Adapter plate for installation on an UP box K


New (incl. fixing screws for the installation of the
HTRRBu on an adapter plate)

THF C 1809515 Sleeve (inside Ø 8 mm) for the protection K


of the sensor when installing it into floor
pavements (for type HF-8 / 4-K2).

HTRRBu-110.XXX JZ-17

Catalogue 2007 | Page 26


Clock controlled electronic thermostat with remote sensor

Heating Technology
(for floor, wall and ceiling heating systems and tiled stoves)
For flush installation – Design Berlin UP
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 230 V ~, 50 Hz Time-dependent control of tem-
Sensor (self-monitoring): external or internal + external (monitor) peratures produced by heating
systems, e.g. electrical systems for
Switching capacity: see ”Equipment”
the heating of floors, fringe zones,
Switching contact: relay / make contact bathrooms, ceilings, tiled stoves,
Setting ranges: see ”Equipment” marble and/or wall heating systems
Switching difference: see ”Equipment” or tempering systems.
Temperature decrease: see ”Equipment”
These clock controlled thermostats
Indications: on the display, see below are equipped with a week-cycle
Degree of protection: IP 30 clock and 3 individually adjustable
Protection class: II, after according installation programs (factory preset to “normal”
day sequences).
Power reserve: 4 days
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 %, non condensing Self-learning function: Autono-
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C mous adaptation of the controller
Radio interference acc. to EN 60730 to the heating time start. Objective:
suppression: Attaining of the comfort temperature
at the adjusted time.
Ambient temperature: 0 … 30°C
The device is delivered with the
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 self-learning function in activated
Colour set accessory: cream white, similar to RAL 1013 condition. The function can never-
Housing material: polycarbonate (PC) theless be deactivated.
Sensor breakdown and deactivation of the heating
OFF function: This function puts
short-circuit protection:
the frost protection function out of
Sensor extension: up to 50 m with 0.5 mm , with
2
service.
double-insulation only
Mounting / installation: in Ø 55 mm UP box – can be adapted Note: The sensor line must be
to almost all currently available flush laid inside the protecting tube.
switch frame systems when using DIN Parallel laying with power cables is
49075 compliant intermediate frames prohibited.
(current overview available on request)
Weight: approx. 350 g (including sensor, 160 g)
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Sensor Circuit diagram PG

FDTR-U 101.130 UA 050018 Floor temperature controller: external (sensor A


SL / OFF #21 Setting range 10 … 50°C (scale HF-8 / 4-K2
1,0 … 5,0) / Switching difference included in the
approx. 1.5 K Self-learning func- scope of the
tion (can be deactivated) Decre- delivery)
ase temperature freely selectable
within a range from 10 to 50°C
(factory setting 18°C) Switching
capacity 16 (2) A / 230 V ~ /
Frost protection function
(rendered active when underrun-
ning a temperature level of approx.
10°C) Indication: Set value / time
alternately (factory setting); Set va-
lue or time permanently (adjustable
via menu)
FDTR-U 101.131 UA 050107 Tiled stove surface tempera- external (sensor A
SL / OFF #21 ture controller: Setting range HF-5 / 4-K3
20 … 80°C (scale in °C) / included in the
Switching difference approx. 5 K. scope of the
Self-learning function (can be delivery)
deactivated / Decrease tempe-
rature freely selectable within a
range from 20 … 80°C (factory
setting 30°C) / Switching capacity
16 (2) A / 230 V ~ / Frost protec-
tion function (rendered active
when underrunning a temperature
level of approx. 20 °C Indication:
Set value in °C / time alternately
(factory setting); Set value or time
permanently (adjustable via menu)

Catalogue 2007 | Page 27


Clock-controlled electronic thermostat with remote sensor
(for floor, wall and ceiling heating systems and tiled stoves)
For flush installation - Design Berlin UP

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Sensor Circuit diagram PG

FDTR-U 101.140 UA 052006 Room temperature controller with floor internal + A


SL / OFF #21 temperature monitoring function: external
Setting range: (sensor
room 5 … 30°C (scale in °C) and floor HF-8 / 4-K2
20 … 60°C (internal scale 2,0 … 6,0) included in
Switching difference: the scope
< 1 K / self-learning function (can be of the
deactivated) delivery)
Decrease temperature:
freely selectable within a range from
5 … 30°C (factory setting 17°C)
Switching capacity:
10 (2) A / 230 V~
Frost protection function:
(rendered active when underrunning a
temperature level of approx. 7°C)
Indication:
Actual value / time alternately (factory
setting); actual value or time permanently
(adjustable via menu) with internal NTC
room sensor for room temperature control
and with remote sensor (4 m, DIN 44574)
for the limitation of the floor temperature
(internal scale).

Accessories Item No. Equipment Notes PG

Cover set RAL 1013 Set 8 - for FDTR-U (frame set see page For conversion to colour RAL 1013 (cream white, M
VV 000011 14 at FTR) electrowhite, pearl white)
HF-8 / 4-K2 G 8000370 Spare sensor for FDTR-U S
101.130 / 140 incl. 4 m cable
(sensor acc. to DIN 44574),
Ø 7.7 mm

HF-5 / 4-K3 D 4771304 Spare sensor for FDTR-U S


101.131 incl. 4 m silicone cable,
Ø 8.9 mm

THF C 1809515 Sleeve (inside Ø 8 mm) for the K


protection of the sensor when
installing it into floor pavements
(for HF-8 / 4-K2 only)

For examples of the integration into different switch lines, see page 14.
FDTR-U

HF-5 / 4-K3 HF-8 / 4-K2 THF

Catalogue 2007 | Page 28


Radio control
NEW

Heating Technology
Overview of transmitters and receivers
Radio transmitters

Other radio transmitter


variants are currently in
the design stage or are
available on request

Your application?
Surface mounted radio Surface mounted radio Surface mounted radio Surface mounted radio
sensor (transmitter), sensor (transmitter) sensor (transmitter) sensor (transmitter) for
super flat design with clock averaging purposes

Other radio transmitter


variants are currently in
the design stage or are
available on request
Multiple radio receiver for
installation into a heating Your application?
Surface mounted circuit distributor
radio receiver Radio receiver, pluggable (4 or 8 heating circuits) Built-in radio receiver

Radio receivers

Application examples (transmitter / receiver combination options):

One transmitter and one receiver

One transmitter and an unlimited number


of receivers

Averaging: one receiver averages over the


values delivered to it by max. 7 actual value
transmitters and by one transmitter with
reference setting function

Master-slave operation (comfort temperature Room to be controlled


indication via the related room transmitter
and time-controlled ECO mode operation, ON
/ OFF switching, holiday and party function
all enabled through the also ”learned” clock
transmitter).

Master-slave operation including averaging (one Room to be controlled


receiver averages of the values delivered to it
by max. 7 actual value transmitters and by one
transmitter with reference setting function; time-
controlled ECO mode operation, ON / OFF swit-
ching, holiday and party function all enabled
through the also taught clock transmitter).

Catalogue 2007 | Page 29


Radio control - TRANSMITTERS
Radio room temperature sensor – Design BERLIN NEW
Technical Data Application
Operating voltage: batteries, 2 x Micro AAA, 1,5 V / 1,000 mAh Radio room temperature sensor
Batterien for the acquisition of temperatures
Setting ranges: 5 … 30°C in living spaces, offices and hotel
rooms that are subject to normal
Sensor: NTC (internal)
pollution. The devices are, if used
Temperature decrease: FTRFBu … (clock): adjustable in association with alre radio recei-
FTRFB … : 4 K (fixly adjusted), or can, if used vers, specially suited for the con-
along with model FTRFBu (master function) trol of temperatures in individual
be set to the decrease temperature adjusted rooms. The devices are particularly
at the radio-controlled time-switch clock. qualified for application cases in
Transmit frequency: 868.3 MHz the building reconstruction sphere
Radio transmission within the line of sight (150 m), approx. 30 or wherever heating systems are to
range: m inside of buildings (min. 1 ferro-concrete be extended.
ceiling / -wall or 3 brick walls)
Their application helps to avoid
Range suppression: mechanical (facility underneath of the
expensive cutting up and/or pla-
adjusting knob)
ster works for the laying of electric
LEDs: for “learn” mode and battery empty indica- cables. The devices are particularly
tion suited for use within office storeys
Degree of protection: IP 30 or floors where flexibility with
Protection class: III regard to the interior design is in
the fore.
Equipment: range suppression, tabletop stand integrated
in all housings of the Berlin 2000 design line
Berlin 3000 design housing
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 % r.h., non condensing Programming mode known
Storage temperature: device: – 20 … + 70°C, batteries: 20°C from mechanical switch clocks:
Regulations and tests: acc. to EN 300 220 programming enabled for each
day individually by means of so-
Ambient temperature: – 10 … + 50°C
called “electronic stops”. Lowest
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 switching time: 15 min.
Housing material: plastic (ABS)
Mounting / installation: directly on the surface / wall by means Other radio transmitter variants are
of screws or adhesive strips. Berlin 3000 currently in the design stage or are
design housing also available with wall sus- available on request.
pension element JZ-18 (see “Accessories”)

Picture Model / ItemNo. Application PG

FTRFB-280.119 Sensor for the acquisition of inroom temperatures and for the radio transmission of the A
BA 010409 sensed data to the controller (receiver) – with reference setter and super flat Berlin
1000 design housing.

FTRFB-080.119 Sensor for the acquisition of inroom temperatures and for the radio transmission of the A
BA 010101 sensed data to the controller (receiver) – with reference setter and Berlin 2000 design
housing.

FTRFB-080.120 Sensor for the acquisition of inroom temperatures and for the radio transmission of the A
BA 010102 sensed data to the controller (radio receiver) – with reference setter and operating
mode selector switch ”Comfort / ECO” including Berlin 2000 design housing.

FTRFB-080.101 Sensor for the acquisition of inroom temperatures and for the radio transmission of the A
BA 010100 sensed data to the controller (receiver) – without reference setter for averaging purpo-
ses. Housing design: Berlin 2000.

FTRFBu-180.117 Sensor for the acquisition of inroom temperatures and for the radio transmission of A
BA 010200 the sensed data to the controller (receiver) including clock. Simplest operation through
direct select keys for ON / OFF, party mode setting and the setting of the desired opera-
ting mode and for the calling of information pertaining to all actual settings. Temperature
setting knob with °C scale. Indication of temperature / time in °C or °F (Fahrenheit),
summer- / winter time changeover, child protection, valve protection and self-learning
mode (can be deactivated), Berlin 3000 design housing, suited as master for master-
slave operation.
FTRFBu-180.121 Identical with FTRFBu-180.117, but with backlight (third separate battery required A
BA 010201 for backlighting only – advantage: the control function is maintained even if the battery
used for backlighting is exhausted)

Catalogue 2007 | Page 0


Radio control - TRANSMITTERS
NEW

Heating Technology
Radio room temperature sensor - Design BERLIN

Picture Model / Item No. Equipment PG

JZ-18 MN 990002 Snap-on type adapter plate for universal installation (controller can be removed) K

”Berlin 1000”

”Berlin 2000”

”Berlin 3000”

Catalogue 2007 | Page 1


Radio control – RECEIVERS
Radio temperature controllers NEW
Technical Data Application
Operating voltage: 230 V ~ / 50 Hz These radio heating controllers
Switching difference: approx. 0.5 K (room temperature) enable, if used in association with
alre radio temperature sensors,
Transmit frequency: 868.3 MHz
to realise the control of tempe-
Antenna: Coaxial type, integrated in the heating cir- ratures in individual rooms. The
(4- / 8-channel) cuit distributor strips. Can, if need be, also devices are particularly qualified
be led through the strip and the distributor for application cases in the
for separate installation (underneath of the building reconstruction sphere or
wallpaper f. ex., wherever heating systems are to
Ø of antenna: 1.1 mm) be extended.
Indications: Three-colour LED indicator. With devices Battery change: The requirement
with several receive channels there exists of a soon battery change is
one indicator LED each per channel (indica- indicated by a red LED on the
tion of the “learning” mode, of the correct transmitter that starts flashing. The
functioning of the of the radio connection required change is beyond that
and indication of a radio link loss). In addi- also indicated on the display of the
tion, the associated channel(s) can, subject radio-controlled time switch at an
to the existence of an established radio already early stage.
connection, be indicated in retrospect by The restoration of the radio link
actuating the “learn” key at the transmitter. between the transmitter and the
Protection class: see ”Equipment” receiver is, in the event a voltage
loss occurred at the receiver or the
Admissible air moisture: 95 % r. H., non condensing
transmitter, effected all automa-
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C tically after the restoration of the
Housing material: see ”Equipment” power supply.
Electrical connections: 0.5 … 2.5 mm2 Other radio receiver variants are
currently in the design stage or are
Emergency operation: All receivers change, in the event of a
available on request.
radio link loss, over to emergency mode
operation (40 %)

Picture Model / Item No. Equipment PG

HTFRA-010.101 1-channel radio temperature controller with Schuko adapter plug, make contact 13.5 (3) A
BA 110300 A for loads of up to 3000 W; application purpose: heating; ambient temperature
0 … 40°C; degree of protection IP 30; protection class II (for protection class I and II
compliant consumers); housing: polycarbonate (PC), pure white, similar to RAL 9010.

HTFRB-010.101 1-channel radio temperature controller for surface installation / wall mounting integrated in Berlin A
BA 110500 2000 design housing; make contact 13.5 (3) A for loads of up 3000 W; application: heating, ambi-
ent temperature 0 … 40°C, degree of protection: IP 30; protection class II (for protection class I and
II compliant consumers); housing: plastic (ABS), pure white, similar to RAL 9010.

HTFRD-214.140 4-channel radio temperature controller for installation in the heating circuit distribution cabinet; appli- A
BA 120600 cation purpose: heating; 4 relay contacts (make contact) 5 (1) A; max. 4 actuating drives per heating
circuit can be connected directly (max. 16 actuating drives in total), including pump module; ambient
temperature 0 … 70°C; degree of protection: IP 65; protection class II (for protection class I and II
compliant consumers); housing: plastic, light grey (RAL 7035); functions: max. 4 time zones possible
(i.e. up to 4 clock equipped transmitters can be connected); master-slave operation; emergency
mode operation; averaging (up to 8 transmitters can be “learned” per channel + 1 transmitter for
master-slave operation); radio link status indication for each channel.
The top of the device can, in order to enable the “learning” of the radio transmitters mounted in the
different rooms, be removed. The power supply is, during this time, ensured by means of a 9 V block
battery. The “learning” of the individual transmitters can be realised very easily through the channel
selection option in combination with the related “learn” key. Fixing: 4 screws for wall mounting are
included in the standard delivery scope – optionally, there is a magnet fixing set (JZ-24) available that
facilitates the installation of the device inside the heating circuit distribution cabinet.
HTFRD-316.125 8-channel radio temperature controller for installation inside the heating circuit distribution cabinet; A
BA 120400 application purpose: heating; 8 relay contacts (make contact) 5 (1) A, max. 4 actuating drives per
heating circuit can be connected directly (max. 32 actuating drives in total), including pump modu-
le; ambient temperature 0 … 70°C; degree of protection: IP 65; protection class II (for protection
class ; and II compliant consumers); housing: plastic, light grey (RAL 7035); functions: max. 8 time
zones possible (i.e. up to 8 clock equipped transmitters can be connected); master-slave operati-
on; emergency mode operation; averaging (up to eight 8 transmitters can be “learned” per channel
+ 1 transmitter for master-slave operation); radio link status indication for each channel.
The top of the device can, in order to enable the “learning” of the radio transmitters mounted in the
different rooms, be removed. The power supply is, during this time, ensured by means of a 9 V
block battery. The “learning” of the individual transmitters can be realised very easily through
the channel selection option in combination with the related “learn” key. Fixing: 4 screws for wall
mounting are included in the standard delivery scope – optionally, there is a magnet fixing set
(JZ-24) available that facilitates the installation of the device inside the heating circuit distribution
cabinet.

Catalogue 2007 | Page 2


Radio control – RECEIVERS
NeW

Heating Technology
Radio temperature controllers
HTFRD-214.140 (4-channel)

HTFRA-010.101 HTFRD-316.125 (8-channel)

HTFRB-010.101 HTFRB-010.101

HTFRD-214.140 HTFRD-316.125

Catalogue 2007 | Page 33


Overview of heating controllers

RTBSB-001.948/1 (PTR 01.0910/2 (24 V)/948/1)


RTBSB-001.062 (PTR 01.034/073/044)
RTBSB-001.026 (PTR 01.025/026/054)

HTRRBu-110.017 (METRU 01.725)


RTBSB-001.910 (PTR 01.901/910)

HTRRB-011.010 (PETR 01.725)


HTRRB-011.410 (PETR 01.825)
KTRVB-048.100 (PETA 75.500)
KTRVB-048.200 (PETA 75.502)
KTRVB-042.100 (PETA 75.800)
KTRVB-042.200 (PETA 75.803)
KTRVB-042.205 (PETA 75.805)
KTRVB-042.206 (PETA 75.815)
KTRVB-042.207 (PETA 75.833)
KTRVB-040.209 (PETA 75.910)

HTRRBu-110.117 (MTRU-xxx)
RTBSB-001.000 (PTR 01.000)
RTBSB-001.002 (PTR 01.002)
RTBSB-001.010 (PTR 01.010)

RTBSB-001.045 (PTR 01.045)


RTBSB-001.048 (PTR 01.048)
RTBSB-001.050 (PTR 01.050)

RTBSB-001.065 (PTR 01.065)


RTBSB-001.075 (PTR 01.075)

RTBSB-001.202 (PTR 01.202)


Actual type
(precursor model)

HTRRBu-110.122
HTRRBu-110.121
HTRRBu-110.021
HTRRBu-110.123
FDTR-U 101,000
FDTR-U 101.130
FDTR-U 101.131
FDTR-U 101.140
RTBSB-201.000
RTBSB-201.002
RTBSB-201.010
RTBSB-201.023
RTBSB-201.062

RTBSB-001.086
RTBSB-001.096

FETR 101.715
FETR 101.745
FTR 101.000
FTR 101.002
FTR 101.010
FTR 101.062
FTR 101.065
FTR 101.073
FTR 101.075
FTR 101.086
FTR 101.202

PTR 01.401
PTR 01.411
PTR 01.086
Page 8 8 8 8 8 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 15 15 15 21 21 19 19 16 16 16 / 17 17 17 18 24 27 27 28 23 25 26 23 25 26

Berlin 1000 x x x x x
Housing Design

Berlin 2000 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Berlin 3000 x x x x x x

Berlin UP x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Pikolo (with plug) x x x

Bimetal (changeover contact) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Bimetal (break contact) x x x x x x x x x x x


Sensor

NTC internal x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

NTC external x x x x x x x x

Floor temperature monitor (NTC) x x x x

Heating controllers x x x* x x x x x* x x* x x x x x x x* x* x* x* x x x* x* x x x x* x* x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Controllers

Continuous-action
x x x x x x
controllers
Continuous-action
x x
controllers (0 … 10 V)
Version with clock x x x x x x x x x x

Natural stone heating system x x x x x x x x

Tiled stove heating systems x x


Applications

Direct electrical
x x x x x x x x x
heating systems
Electrical floor
x x x x x x x x x
heating systems
Warm water floor
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
heating systems

”Temperature decrease”
output – master clock x x x x x x x
function
”Temperature decrease”
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
input
”ON / OFF” switch x x x x x x x x x x x

”Heating / Cooling” switch x x x


”Temperature decrease”
x x
switch Comfort / Automatic
Equipment

”Additional heating”switch x

LCD-display (+ 4 keys) x x x x

LCD-display (+ 9 keys) x x x


LCD-display
x x x
(+ 9 keys and backlight)
Lamp ”ON / OFF” x x x x

Lamp ”Heating” x x x x x x x
Lamp ”Temperature
x x x x
decrease”
Lamp ”Additional heating” x

Control range – 20 … + 30°C x

Control range 10 … 60°C x x x


Deviate Technics

Control range 20 … 80°C x x

Switching capacity 3000 W x x x x x x

Internal setting x x

24 V ~ oder 230 V ~ x

24 V ~ x x x x x x x x x x

x * Heating controllers suited for control of systems with normally opened valves

Catalogue 2007 | Page 34


Air Conditioning Technology

Air Conditioning Technology


Air conditioning technology overview:
Climate controllers
Bimetal controllers for surface installation Page 38

Bimetal controllers for surface installation Page 39

Electronic controllers for surface installation Page 40 – Page 41

Air Conditioning Technology


Cooling ceiling controllers
Electronic controllers for the control of cooling ceilings Page 42 – Page 43
(for surface installation)

Electronic controllers for the control of cooling ceilings Page 44


(for flush installation)

Dew point monitoring


Dew point monitors Page 45 – Page 46

Dew point sensors Page 45 – Page 46

Remote controls
Remote controls Page 47

Hygrostats / hygrothermostats
For applications in privately or commecially used rooms Page 48 – Page 49
(surface or flush installation)

For applications within the industrial sphere Page 50 – Page 51


(installation in conduits and switch cabinets)

Tabular overview of types Page 52

Catalogue 2007 | Page 7


Bimetal climate controllers
For surface installation – Design Pikolo 2
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 250 V ~ / 50 / 60 Hz Control or supervision of tem-
Sensor: bimetal peratures in closed dry rooms.
Specially suited for use with air
Switching current: 3 (3) A
conditioners (fancoils).
Contact: changeover contact
Setting ranges: 5 … 30°C; 16 … 30°C (swelling arrow) Can also be applied for remote
Switching difference: approx. 0.5 K control purposes, see PFB
20.801, PFB 20.802 (as of
Temperature decrease: optional
page 47).
Switch: see below – max. 2 switches possible
Degree of protection: IP 30 Other electrical circuitry designs
Protection class: II, after acc. installation possible on request.
General equipment: thermal recirculation
Note: For further climate control-
mechanical range suppression
lers, also please refer to pages 9
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 % r.h., non condensing to 10 (RTBSB-001.010 / 065) and
Storage temperature: – 20...+ 70°C pages 12 to 13 (FTR 101.010 /
Radio interference suppression: acc. to EN 60730 101.065). For flush mounted
cooling ceiling controllers see
Ambient temperature: 0 … 30°C
page 44.
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010
Housing material: plastic (ABS)
Mounting / installation: surface installation / wall mounting
Weight: approx. 110 g
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Circuit diagram PG

PTR 02.801 A 201153 1st switch: ON / OFF A


2nd switch: for fan operation
at three different speed stages
“slow / medium / fast”

PTR 02.802 A 201154 1st switch: “heating / off / cooling” A


2nd switch: for fan operation
at three different speed stages
“slow / medium / fast”
Controller for 2-pipe systems

PTR 02.803 A 201247 Switch: “off / fast / medium / slow” A


Cooling function only
With “cooling” indicator lamp and swelling
arrow, temperature range 16 … 30°C

Catalogue 2007 | Page 8


Bimetal climate controllers
For surface installation – Design Berlin 3000
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 250 V ~ / 50 / 60 Hz Control and supervision of tem-
Sensor: bimetal peratures in dry, closed rooms.
Remote control of air conditioners
Switching current: 6 (3) A ~
and fancoil units and fancoil systems
Contact: changeover contact in living spaces, offices and surgery
Setting ranges: 5 … 30°C rooms.
Switching difference: approx. 0.5 K
Specially suited for the optimisation
Switch: see “Equipment”
of central air conditioning systems in

Air Conditioning Technology


Degree of protection: IP 30 hotels, hospitals, etc.
Protection class: II, after acc. installation
General equipment: thermal recirculation Suited for all types of heating
mechanical range suppression systems. (Also please pay regard to
the switching capacity information in
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 % r.h., non condensing
the corresponding “circuit diagram”).
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C
Radio interference suppression: EN 60730 Note: For further climate control-
Ambient temperature: 0 … 30°C lers, also please see pages 9 to10
(RTBSB-001.010 / 065) and 12 to13
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010
(FTR 101.010 / 101.065). For flush
Housing material: plastic (ABS) mounted cooling ceiling controllers
Mounting / installation: surface installation / wall mounting see page 44.
Weight: approx. 160 g
See also “General technical informa-
Electrical connections: terminal screws
tion” as of page 164.

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Circuit diagram PG

KTBSB-112.000 MA 200100 ON / OFF switch: 3-stage fan A


New (for controller with Pikolo 2 design housing,
see page 38 = PTR 02.801)
Replaces
MTR 52.041

KTBSB-113.500 MA 200000 Switch / lamp: ON / OFF A


New Switch: “heating / ventilation / cooling”
Lamps: “heating” and “cooling”
Replaces Switch: “3-stage fan”
MTR 53.068 Controller for 4-pipe systems

ETBSB-113.500 MA 210000 Application: direct excitation of a heat A


New pump
Switch / lamp: ON / OFF
Switch: “heating / ventilation / cooling”
Lamps: “heating” and “cooling”
Switch: “3-stage fan”

JZ-17 MN 990001 Adapter plate for installation on an UP box K


New (incl. fixing screws for the installation of the
KTBSB/ETBSB on the adapter plate)
Further climate controllers in preparation – see overview of climate controllers on page 52, for electronic climate controllers
see as of page 40 and for flush mounted climate controllers as of page 44

JZ-17

Catalogue 2007 | Page 9


Electronic climate controllers
For surface installation – Design Berlin 3000 NEW
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 230 V / 50 / 60 Hz Control of climates in individual
Temperature sensor: 47 k NTC (external) / 47 k NTC (internal) rooms. Device with neutral
zone for the control of 2- or 4-
Changeover sensor: 47 k NTC (external for heating / cooling
pipe air conditioning systems.
changeover)
Switching current: heating 5 (1) A; cooling 5 (1) A; Regarding sensors, see as of
fan 6 (2) A / 230 V ~ page 99.
Contact: relay (1 make contact each for heating
/ cooling) See also “General technical
Heating / cooling changeover via an external changeover sensor or information” as of page 164.
via contact
Setting ranges: 5 … 30°C
Switching difference: approx. 1 K
Neutral zone: approx. 2 K, permanently
Switch: ON / OFF, 3-stage fan
Degree of protection: IP 30, after acc. installation
Protection class: II, after acc. installation
General equipment: mechanical range suppression;
Jumper: ext. / int. sensor
Jumper: heating and cooling (4-pipe
systems) / heating or cooling (2-pipe
systems);
Jumper: fan ON / OFF within the
neutral zone
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 % r.h., non condensing
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C
Radio interference suppression: acc. to EN 60730
Ambient temperature: 0 … 30°C
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010
Housing material: plastic (ABS)
Mounting / installation: surface installation / wall mounting
Weight: device: approx. 250 g / sensor: approx.
150 g
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Sensor Circuit diagram PG

KTRRB-112.135 MA 600800 Climate controller with 3-stage fan out- internal or external see next page A
New put and inlet (e. g. via window contact) sensor (the tempera-
for external excitation. ture and changeover
Replaces “Off plus frost protection monitoring” sensors HF-2, LF-22
METR (terminals 14 / 13): contact closed = or ALF-2) are not
75.836 / 3 normal operation; contact open = ope- included in the scope
ration in frost protection mode. of the delivery
Heating / cooling changeover triggered
via external changeover sensor or via
contact (terminals 16 / 15): contact clo-
sed = heating; contact open = cooling.
Room frost protection function active
with ON / OFF switch in OFF position.
KTRRB-112.136 MA 600900 Climate controller with 3-stage fan out- internal or external see next page A
New put and inlet (e.g. via window contact) sensor (the tempera-
for external excitation. ture and changeover
Replaces ECO mode (terminals 14 / 13): sensors HF-2, LF-22
75.836 / 4 contact closed = normal operation; or ALF-2) are not
contact closed = ECO mode operation. included in the scope
The neutral zone (2 K) is, during of the delivery
operation in ECO mode, enlarged by
± 3 K. The ECO mode is a special ener-
gy economizing mode that should either
be controlled through a window contact
or a switch clock; heating / cooling
changeover triggered via external
change-over sensor or via contact (ter-
minals 16 / 15): contact closed = heating;
contact open = cooling).
Room frost protection function active
with ON / OFF switch in OFF position.

Catalogue 2007 | Page 0


Electronic climate controllers NEW
For surface installation – Design Berlin 3000

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Sensor Circuit diagram PG

JZ-17 MN 990001 Adapter plate for installation on K


New an UP box (incl. fixing screws
for installation of the KTRRB on
the adapter plate)
Additional climate controllers in preparation – see overview of climate controllers on page 52,
for electronic climate controllers see as of page 38 and for flush mounted climate controllers as of page 44

Air Conditioning Technology


JZ-17

Catalogue 2007 | Page 1


Electronic cooling ceiling controllers
For surface installation – Design Berlin 2000
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 24 V ~ / = approx. 1 VA Control of temperatures that
safety extra low voltage exist at cooling ceilings and walls
Sensor: internal, NTC (47 k Ω) and/or in warm water heating
external flow sensor, NTC (47 k Ω) systems.
(changeover sensor), external dew
point sensor (TPS) For flush mounted cooling ceiling
controllers see page 44.
Switching current: 1A / 24 V ~ (max. 32 VA)
Switching contact: relay / make contact Both the dew point sensor (see
Setting ranges: 5 … 30°C; 21° ± 8 K page 45) and the changeover
Switching difference: approx. 1 K sensor “2” (see “Sensor Techno-
logy” as of page 99) need to be
Degree of protection: IP 30
ordered seperately!
Protection class: III
General equipment: mechanical range suppression
Indicators (LEDs): see “Equipment”
Switch: see “Equipment”
Admissible air moisture: max.95 % r.h., non condensing
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C
Radio interference suppression: acc. to EN 60730
Ambient temperature: 0 … 50°C
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010
Housing material: plastic (ABS)
Mounting / installation: surface installation / wall mounting
Weight: approx. 130 g
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Equipment Sensor Circuit diagram PG

KTRRB-042.211 Setting range (turning knob): 21°C ± 3 K internal A


DA 420000 The factory preset “zero” (21°C) can be changed dew point
internally by ± 5K. sensor
Outputs: Relay output “cooling and heating”.
Heating / cooling hysteresis: approx.1 K.
Inputs: Internal sensor (NTC 47 k Ω)
Dew point sensor (TPS) for cooling mode interruption
(max. 5 dew point sensors can be operated in parallel).
Scale: Relative scale (set value 21°C with “0” marking
Replaces and swelling arrows (“+” for warmer and “–” for colder)
PETR 75.873 / 1 Indications:
Two-colour LED indicator on the left:
red for “heating” or green for “cooling”
Two-colour LED indicator on the right:
red for “dew point” or green for “ON”
Functions: Heating and cooling with adjustable
neutral zone. Cooling mode interrupted in the event
the dew point sensor detects the condensation of
moisture.
Adjustments: neutral zone ± 0.5 … 2.5 K
(± 0.5 K, factory setting)
Application: Control of temperatures in individual
rooms. The device is equipped with a relay output for
the actuation of the valves which are employed for the
control of climates produced by 4-pipe systems (with
adjustable neutral zone and interruption of the cooling
operation in the event the external dew point sensor
detects the condensation of moisture).

Catalogue 2007 | Page 2


Electronic cooling ceiling controllers
For surface installation – Design Berlin 2000

Model / Picture Equipment Sensor Circuit diagram PG

KTRRB-040.112 Control range: 5 … 30°C internal A


DA 420100 Output: Relay output “cooling or heating”. dew point
Heating / cooling hysteresis: approx.1 K sensor
Inputs: Internal sensor (NTC 47 K Ω), Dew point sensor (TPS)
for cooling mode interruption (max. 5 dew point sensors can
be operated in parallel). External contact for ECO function
triggering.
Switch: “Cooling / heating changeover”.

Air Conditioning Technology


Scale: 5 … 30°C, mechanical range suppression Indications:
Replaces Indications: Two-colour LED indicator on the left:
PETR 75.972 / 1 red for “heating” or green for “cooling”
Two-colour LED indicator on the right:
red for “dew point” and green for “ECO”
Functions: Heating or cooling (can be switched over manually);
ECO function (temperature decrease when heating and tempe-
rature increase when cooling), can be triggered via an external
contact (terminal 7). Interruption of the cooling operations in the
event of moisture condensation.
Adjustments: ECO zone ± 0.5 … 2.5 K (± 1 K, factory setting)
Application: Control of the temperatures in individual rooms.
The device is equipped with a relay output for the control of the
related valves (manually switchable cooling / heating control).
KTRRB-040.213 Setting range (turning knob): 21°C ± 3 K, the factory preset internal A
DA 420200 “zero” (21°C) can be adjusted internally by ± 5 K. dew point
Outputs: Relay output “cooling or heating”. Cooling / heating sensor/
hysteresis: approx. 1 K change
Inputs: Internal sensor (NTC 47 k Ω). Dew point sensor (TPS) over sensor,
for cooling mode interruption (max. 5 dew point sensors can be e.g. HF-2,
operated in parallel). ALF-2
Changeover sensor or changeover contact for cooling/ heating
changeover. External contact for ECO function triggering.
Replaces Switch: “OFF (forced switch off) / day / ECO”
PETR 75.975 / 1 Scale: Relative scale (set value 21°C with “0” marking and swel-
ling arrows (“+” for warmer and “–” for colder)
Indications:
Two-colour LED indicator on the left: red for “heating” or green
for “cooling”
Two-colour LED indicator on the right: red for “dew point” and
green for “ECO”
Functions: Switchable between heating or cooling via an ex-
ternal changeover sensor or changeover contact. ECO function
(temperature decrease when heating, temperature increase when
cooling), can be triggered via an external contact (terminal 7).
Forced switch off can be activated via switch operation (position
”0”). Frost protection monitoring of rooms at approx. 5°C.
Interruption of the cooling operations in the event of moisture
condensation.
Adjustments: ECO zone ± 0.5 … 2.5 K (±1 K, factory setting)
Application: Control of temperatures in individual rooms. The
device is equipped with a relay output that enables to trigger the
changing between the cooling and heating control operations
through the operation of a changeover sensor or a changeover
contact. Additionally equipped with an “ECO and forced switch
off function” switch and an external contact for the triggering of
the ECO function.
Note: For flush mounted cooling ceiling controllers see as of page 44.

Catalogue 2007 | Page 


Electronic cooling ceiling controllers
For flush installation – Design Berlin UP NEW
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 24 V, 50 / 60 Hz For the control of the heating and
safety extra low voltage cooling operations executed by 2-
Sensor: internal NTC 47 k Ω, external flow and 4-pipe systems in hotel and living
sensor NTC 47 k Ω (changeover rooms and business premises.
sensor), external dew point sensor
Up to 5 valve drives (24 V ~, normally
Switching current: 1 A / 24 V ~
closed types) can be actuated per
Switching contact: relay / make contact outlet. Special plug-in bridges enable
Setting ranges: 21°C ± 8 K (swelling arrow red / blue) to adapt the controllers to the 2- or
Switching difference: heating: < 1 K / cooling: < 1 K 4-pipe systems that need to be con-
trolled. The operation of the device
Neutral zone: approx. 2 K, permanent
in 2-pipe mode takes place based
ECO zone: ± 3 K fixly adjusted
on a joint heating / cooling outlet, the
Indicators (LEDs): red = heating / blue = cooling shifting of the operating direction of
yellow = cooling mode interrup- which can be triggered by an external
tion through the condensation of contact (changeover contact) or by a
moisture; red (switch in position flow sensor (NTC 47 k Ω). The device
“OFF”) = anti-frost triggering provides the option to connect dew
Degree of protection: IP 30 point sensors (TPS, max. 5 pieces
in parallel) in addition. The detection
Protection class: III
of the formation of condensate by
General equipment: mechanical range suppression the dew point sensor results in the
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 %, non condensing closing of the cooling valve.
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C
An external contact enables the
Radio interference acc. to EN 60730
triggering of the energy econo-mizing
suppression:
function (ECO).
Ambient temperature: 0 … 40°C
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 Setting the switch of the model KTR-
(Optional: RAL 1013) RU-052.204 to “OFF” will activate
Housing material: polycarbonate (PC) the room frost protection function (all
valves are opened forcibly upon the
Mounting / installation: in an UP box (Ø 55 mm) – can be
lower deviation of a temperature level
adapted to almost all currently
of 5°C).
available flush switch frame systems
when using DIN 49075 compliant
Both the dew point sensor (see page
intermediate frames (current overview
45) and the changeover sensor “2”
available on request)
(see “Sensor Technology” as of page
Weight: approx. 160 g 99) need to be ordered seperately!
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Sensor Circuit diagram PG

KTRRU-052.203 UA 210000 Climate controller with dew internal A


New point signal switch-in for dew point
the control of 2- and 4-pipe sensor
systems
changeo-
ver sensor,
e.g. HF-2,
ALF-2

KTRRU-052.204 UA 210200 Climate controller with dew internal A


New point signal switch-in for dew point
the control of 2- and 4-pipe sensor
system. Equipped with “OFF
(forced switch off) / day / changeo-
ECO“ switch. Frost protec- ver sensor,
tion function active with the e.g. HF-2,
switch in OFF position. ALF-2

with ALRE standard frame with intermediate frame

Catalogue 2007 | Page 


Electronic dew point monitors and dew point sensors
For fastening on standard rail
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: see “Equipment” For the interruption of the cooling
Power consumption: approx. 1 VA operations in cases where the
relative humidity transcends a
Sensor: external dew point sensor (TPS),
level of 98 %.
max. 5 sensors can be connected
Fixed switching point: 98 % r.h. Specially suited to prevent water
Switching output potential-free changeover contact from dripping off or to avoid the
Switching capacity: Make contact: 10 (3) A / 230 V ~ formation of condensed water on
Break contact: 5 (2) A / 230 V ~ cooling lines. The sensors used

Air Conditioning Technology


with these devices are types of
Min. switching current: 5 mA
the TPS series. Up to 5 sensors
Hysteresis: approx. 4 % r.h. can be connected to the sensor
Indicators (LEDs): red (= triggering upon the attaining of input in parallel. Sensors need
the dew point) be ordered seperately.
Degree of protection: IP 20
Important: The inlet air ducts of
Protection class: see “Equipment”
the sensor models TPS-1 and
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 %, non condensing TPS-2 have, in order to protect
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 70°C them against the ingress of dirt
Radio interference suppression: acc. to EN 60730 during their installation, been
closed by the manufacturer. After
Ambient temperature: 0 … 55°C
installation, a knife must be used
Housing colour: light grey, similar to RAL 7035 to cut them flush with the wall, so
Housing material: plastic (PC) that the air can circulate through
Mounting / installation: on standard rail them as required.
Weight: NEHR / WFRRN: approx. 160 g
TPS: approx. 30 g
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Circuit diagram PG

NEHR 24.401 D 4780564 24 V ~ / = protective extra low A


voltage
Protection class: III; up to 5
TPS dew point sensors can be
connected to the sensor input
in parallel. Sensors need to be
ordered seperately.

WFRRN-210.018 D 4780572 230 V ~, 50 / 60 Hz A


Protection class: II, after acc.
installation; up to 5 TPS dew
point sensors can be connected
NEW to the sensor input in parallel.
Sensors need to be ordered
seperately.

TPS 1 G 8000299 Cable length: 10 m Possible applications: A


2 clips for fixing of the – With dry construction cooling ceilings
cooling mat (plasterboard) with mounted capillary tube mat
– With metal cooling system installations with
integrated capillary tube systems

TPS 2 G 8000300 Cable length: 10 m Possible applications: A


2 clips for fixing of the – With cold water pipes
cooling mat – With cooling ceiling systems for concealed
2 cable straps installation (capillary tube systems)

TPS 3 SN 120000 Cable length: 10 m Possible applications: A


2 cable straps – With cold water pipes
Caution! The sensor is, due to its open construction,
only suited for use in clean environments and needs
NEW to installed in an easily removable manner.

Catalogue 2007 | Page 5


Electronic dew point monitors and dew point sensors
For installation on standard rail
NEHR / WFRRN TPS 1

TPS 1 TPS 2

TPS 1 / 2 TPS 3

TPS 3

Catalogue 2007 | Page 46


Controls for the remote operation of climate controllers
For surface installation – Design Pikolo
Technische Daten Application
Operating voltage: 24 V ~ … 250 V ~ / 50 / 60 Hz + 10 / Control for the remote operation of air
– 15 % at 24 V ~ min. 100 mA conditioning systems (e.g. fancoils).
Switching current: 6 (3) A (PFB 20) / 2 (2) A (PFB 02)
Switch: see below – max. 2 switches possible
Degree of protection: IP 30
Protection class: II, after acc. installation
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 % r.h., non condensing

Air Conditioning Technology


Storage temperature: – 20 ... + 70°C
Ambient temperature: – 10 ... 40°C
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010
Housing material: plastic (ABS)
Mounting / installation: surface installation / wall mounting
Weight: approx. 75 g
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Circuit diagram PG

PFB 02 A 201213 1st switch: ON / OFF A


2nd switch: for fan operation
at three different speed stages
“slow / medium / fast”

PFB 20.801 A 201232 1st switch: ON / OFF A


2nd switch: for fan operation
at three different speed stages
“slow / medium / fast”

PFB 20.802 A 201233 1st switch: “heating / off / cooling” A


2nd switch: for fan operation
at three different speed stages
“slow / medium / fast”

Flush mounted remote controls available on request – see also FUF as of page 107.

PFB 02 PFB 20

Catalogue 2007 | Page 7


Hygrostats / hygrothermostats with mechanically operated sensors
For surface installation – Design Berlin 2000 / 3000 / UP
Technical data Application
Hygrostat (for thermostat see at RKDSB):
Switching voltage: 24 … 250 V ~; > 24 V , in VDE 0110 Hygrostat: The room hygrostat serves
compliant rooms only for the supervision and control of the
Sensor: synthetic fibres relative humidity in business premises,
domiciles, habitations, conservatories,
Switching capacity: at 250 V ~ und 24 V ~
bathing rooms, swimming pools, EDP
Entfeuchten: 5 (0.2) A min. 100 mA rooms, etc. The relative humidity pre-
Dehumidifying: 3 (0.2) A / FHY: 2 (0.2) A / min. 100 mA vailing in a room impacts on a special
Contact: changeover contact sensing strip that, upon the attaining
of a certain value, triggers a change-
Min.-Switching current: min. 100 mA at 24 V ~
over contact. The adjusting knob on
Setting ranges: 30 … 100 % r.h. / FHY: 35 … 85 % r.h. the front of the device enables to ad-
Switching difference: ca. 4 % r.h. / FHY: ca. 5 % r.h. just the desired set value. The setting
range can be restricted.
Measuring accuracy: approx. 3 % r.h.
(microswitch at 50 % r.h.) Hygrothermostat: Supervision and
FHY: ca. 4 % r.h. control of the relative humidity of the
(microswitch at 50 % r.h.) temperature combined in one device.
Degree of protection: IP 30
Note: Take care to comply with the
Protection class: II after acc. installation
distances that need to be observed
General equipment: mechanical range suppression between modular bathroom units as
Admissible air moisture: max. 95 % r.h., non condensing specified in DIN VDE 0100-701!
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 60°C
Ambient temperature: 10 … 60°C, FHY + RKDSB: 0 … 50°C
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010
Housing material: plastic (ABS) / FHY: polycarbonate (PC)
Mounting / installation: wall mounting or installation on an
UP box
Weight: approx. 90 g
FHY: approx. 110 g
RKDSB: approx. 160 g
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Circuit diagram PG

RFHSB-060.010 MA 020000 External setting A

Replaces
PHY 60.010

RFHSB-060.011 MA 020100 Internal setting A

Replaces
PHY 60.011

FHY 101.060#21 UA 020003 External setting A


For flush installation – can be adapted to al-
most all currently available flush switch frame
systems when using DIN 49075 compliant in-
termediate frames (current overview available
on request). For examples of the integration
into different switch lines, see page 14.
RKDSB-171.000 MA 220000 1 ON / OFF switch for both thermostat A
and hygrostat
Replaces Thermostat: external setting
MHT 60.300 Control range: 10 … 35°C
Switching current: 10 (4) heating – 250 V ~
5 (2) cooling – 250 V ~
1 (1) heating / cooling – 24 V ~
Switching difference: approx. 1 K

Catalogue 2007 | Page 8


Hygrostats / hygrothermostats with mechanically operated sensors
For surface installation – Design Berlin 2000 / 3000 / UP

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment PG

JZ-17 MN 990001 Adapter plate for the installation of the K


New RKDSB on an UP box (incl. fixing screws for
the installation of the RKDSB on the plate)

JZ-17 RFHSB

Air Conditioning Technology


FHY RKDSB

FHY with ALRE standard frame FHY with intermediate frame

Catalogue 2007 | Page 9


Hygrostats with mechanically operated sensors
For installation in conduits or switch cabinets – Design Uni II / Pikolo
Technical data HI PHY Application
Switching voltage: 24 … 250 V ~; > 24 V, in dry, VDE 0110 HI
compliant rooms only Specially suited for the control or
Sensor: synthetic fibres supervision of the atmospheric
moisture in ventilation ducts and
Switching capacity:
air conditioning conduits, climatic
Dehumidifying: 15 (8) A 5 (0.2) A exposure test cabinets and dehumi-
Humidifying: 15 (8) A 2 (0.2) A dification devices employed in the
Contact: 1 / 2 changeover changeover industrial and agricultural sphere.
contact contact Inappropriate for use in aggressive
gases. Max. air velocity 8 m/sec. or
Minimum load: min. 150 mA min. 100 mA
15 m/sec. when using a protective
at 24 V ~ at 24 V ~
sensor sleeve (FS-HI).
Setting ranges: 30 … 100 % r.h.
Switching difference: approx. 5 % r.h. approx. 4 % r.h. PHY
Specially suited for the supervision
Measuring accuracy: ± 3.5 % r.h. ± 3 % r.h. and control of the moisture content
(> 50 % r.h.) (at 50 % r.h.) inside of switch cabinets, automatic
± 4 % r.h. machines, etc. and for the protec-
(< 50 % r.h.) tion of electrical and / or electronic
components against the influence of
Degree of protection: IP 65 IP 30
moisture.
Protection class: II, after according installation
Storage temperature: – 20 … + 60°C
Ambient temperature: 0 … 60°C 10 … 60°C
Housing colour: grey grey
(similar to (similar to
RAL 7035 / 7016) RAL 7035)
Housing material: ABS ABS
Mounting / installation: inside of conduits on standard rail
Weight: approx. 370 g approx. 85 g
Electrical connections: terminal screws

Model / Picture Item No. Equipment Circuit diagram PG

HI-1 JA 010100 External setting B

HI-1F JA 010200 Internal setting B

HI-2 JA 010300 External setting - 2 stages B


(difference between the stages adjustable
within a range from 3 … 15 % r.h., factory
setting > 6 % r.h.)

PHY 60.082 A 261004 External setting – can be connected from A


outside – specially suited for installation in
switch cabinets

Catalogue 2007 | Page 50


Hygrostats with mechanically operated sensors
For installation in conduits or switch cabinets – Design Uni II / Pikolo

Accessories / options PG

JZ-20-1 E 6130144 Wall suspension element for HI K

FS-HI H 530975 Protective sensor sleeve for HI K

Air Conditioning Technology


Screwed cable gland M 20 x 1.5 (standard: M 16 x 1.5) for HI possible if desired B

HI-. PHY 60.082

Catalogue 2007 | Page 51


Overview of climate controllers

RTBSB-001.026 (PTR 01.026/01.054)

KTRRB-112.135 (METR 75.836 / 3)

KTRRB-112.136 (METR 75.836 / 4)


KTRVB-042.100 (PETA 75.800/803)
KTRRB-042.211 (PETR 75.873 / 1)

KTRRB-040.112 (PETR 75.972 / 1)

KTRRB-040.213 (PETR 75.975 / 1)


RTBSB-001.948/1 (PTR 01910/2)

KTRVB-048.100 (PETA 75.500)

KTRVB-048.200 (PETA 75.502)

KTRVB-042.200 (PETA 75.803)

KTRVB-042.205 (PETA 75.805)

KTRVB-042.206 (PETA 75.815)

KTRVB-042.207 (PETA 75.833)

KTRVB-040.209 (PETA 75.910)


KTBSB-112.000 (MTR 52.041)

KTBSB-113.500 (MTR 53.068)


RTBSB-001.010 (PTR 01.010)

RTBSB-001.065 (PTR 01.065)

RTBSB-001.910 (PTR 01.910)


Actual type
(precursor model)

KTBSB- 113.003

KTRRU-052.203

KTRRU-052.204
RTBSB-201.010

ETBSB-113.500

ETBSB-113.501
FTR 101.010

FTR 101.065
PTR 01.082

PTR 02.801

PTR 02.802

PTR 02.803
Page 8 11 12 13 9 9 10 10 11 39 39 / 39 / 38 38 38 44 44 42 43 43 16 16 16 / 17 17 17 18 40 41

Berlin 1000 x
Housing Design

Berlin 2000 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Berlin 3000 x x x x x x x
Berlin UP x x x x
Pikolo 2 x x x
Switch cabinet x

Bimetal (changeover contact) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Sensor

NTC internal x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
NTC external x x x
Dew point sensors x x x x x

Cooling controllers with


x
fan output “cooling only”
Climate controllers x x x x x x x x x x x
Climate controllers (0… 10 V) x x x x x x
Controllers

Climate controllers with


x x x x x x x x
fan output
Climate controllers with
x x x x x
neutral zone
Climate controllers with
x x
neutral zone and fan output
Mixing chamber controllers
x x
(0 … 10 V)

Control of climates in
Pipe systems

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
2-pipe systems

Control of climates in
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
4-pipe systems

Fancoils x x x x x x x x x x
Air distribution systems x x x x x x x x x x
Applications

Partial air conditioning


x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
systems
Cooling ceilings x x x x x x x x x x x
Heat pumps x x
Split type air conditioning
x x x x x
units
Switch cabinet x

“ECO” input x x x x x
Changeover input
x x x x
“heating / cooling”
Input “off plus frost
x x x
protection monitoring”
“ON / OFF” switch x x x x x x x
“ON / OFF” switch with
x x
frost protection
Switch “heating / cooling” x x x x x
Switch “heating /
x x x x
ventilating / cooling”
Equipment

Switch “ECO / comfort /


off with frost protection x x x
monitoring”
Switch “fan” x x x x x x x x x x
Lamp “ON / OFF” x x x x
Lamp “heating mode” x x
Lamp “cooling mode” x
Lamp “heating” x x x x x x
Lamp “cooling” x x x x x x x
Lamp „heating / cooling“ x x
Lamp “ECO” x x x
Lamp “cooling interruption due
x x x x x
to the formation of condensate”

Control range 10 … 60°C x x


Misc.

Internal setting x x
24 V ~ oder 230 V ~ x
24 V ~ x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Additional climate controllers are currently in the design stage. For precursor models, see Catalogue 2005!
Catalogue 2007 | Page 52
Industrial Technology

Industrial Technology
Industrial technology overview:
Capillary- and frost protection thermostats
Industry room thermostats (1-, 2-, 4-stage / 2 setting ranges) Page 56 – Page 58

Capillary thermostats (1-, 2-stage) 0.5…4.5 m. Page 59 – Page 62

Rod thermostats (boiler and ventilating controllers) TR / TW / STB Page 63 – Page 68

Channel thermostats / air heater thermostats Page 69 – Page 71

Clip-on thermostats Page 72 – Page 73

Frost protection thermostats Page 74 – Page 76

Temperature controllers, mechanical / electronic


Wet room thermostats / double thermostats Page 77

Temperature difference thermostats Page 78

Industrial Technology
Compact thermostats for installation in switch cabinets (on DIN rail) Page 79 – Page 82
and universal thermostats (for surface installation)

Multi-stage controllers (2-, 4-, 6-, 8-stage) Page 83 – Page 85

Digital controllers / digital displays


Digital temperature indicators Page 86

Digital thermostats Page 87

Microprocessor-controllers and Page 88 – Page 89


quasicontinuous microprocessor controllers

Flow- / pressure monitoring


Air flow sensing relay / electronic air flow monitors Page 90 – Page 91

Differential pressure switches (pressure cell design Page 92 – Page 93

Flow monitors for the control of liquid media Page 94 – Page 96

Catalogue 2007 | Page 55


One-stage industry room thermostats JET-40 / -41 / -110 R / -120 R
Capillary system, outdoor sensor
Technical data Application
Switching capacity: 15 (8) A, 24 –250 V ~, Control or supervision of tempera-
bei 24 V ~ min. 150 mA tures in non-aggressive environments
Contact: 1 microswitch as potential-free in the industrial sphere, e.g. for the
changeover contact control of heating or air conditioning
systems in green houses, industrial
Ambient temperature: JET-40 / -41:
halls, sports halls, air inflated struc-
– 20°C … + (see “max. sensor temperature”)
tures, cold stores, refrigerator and
JET-110 R / -120 R:
deep freeze rooms.
– 35°C … + (see “max. sensor temperature”)
Degree of protection: JET-40 / -41: IP 54 The JET-110 RF is particularly suited
JET-110 R / -120 R: IP 65 for use as outdoor thermostat.
Protection class: I
Sensor: JET-40 / -41: V2A (1.43 01)
JET-110 R / -120 R: Cu
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016,
upper part RAL 7035)

Type Item No. Control range Max. sensor Switching- Equipment PG


temperature difference

JET-40 C 1810605 0 … 35°C 40°C 1K external setting B

JET-40 F C 1810606 0 … 35°C 40°C 1K internal setting B

JET-41 C 1810607 0 … 70°C 80°C 2K external setting B

JET-41 F C 1810608 0 … 70°C 80°C 2K internal setting B

JET-110 R JA 045100 – 35 … 30°C 35°C 2 … 20 K external setting (with mecha- B


adjustable nical range suppression)

JET-110 RF JA 045200 – 35 … 30°C 35°C 2 … 20 K internal setting (with mecha- B


adjustable nical range suppression)
JET-120 R JA 046100 0 … 60°C 70°C 2 … 20 K external setting (with mecha- B
adjustable nical range suppression)
JET-120 RF JA 046200 0 … 60°C 70°C 2 … 20 K internal setting B
adjustable (with sight-glass)
Option: (for JET-110 R / -120 R): screwed cable gland M 20 x 1.5 (standard M 16 x 1.5)

JET-40 F JET-120 R JET-110 RF

JET-4. JET-1.. JET-1..

JET-4.

Catalogue 2007 | Page 56


Multistage industry room thermostats JMT-211 / -212 / JMT-411
Capillary system, outdoor sensor, 2 or 4 stages
Technical data Application
Switching capacity: 15 (8) A, 24 – 250 V ~, Control of temperatures in non-
min. 150 mA at 24 V ~ aggressive environments in the
Contact: 2 or 4 microswitches as potential-free industrial field.
changeover contacts
2 or 4 stages “heating or cooling” or
Ambient temperature: – 15 … + 55°C
“heating and cooling” with neutral
Degree of protection: IP 65 zone.
Protection class: I
Sensor: liquid filled quick response sensing
element made of Cu
Colour: JMT-2xx: grey (bottom part RAL
7016, upper part RAL 7035)
JMT-4xx: grey

Type Item No. Control Switching difference Switching difference Equipment PG


range within the stage limits between the stages

JMT-212 E 6080001 – 15 … + 30°C 1K 1 … 7 K adjustable external setting B


JMT-212 F E 6080102 – 15 … + 30°C 1K 1 … 7 K adjustable internal setting B
JMT-211 E 6080049 10 … 55°C 1K 1 … 7 K adjustable external setting B
JMT-211 F E 6080138 10 … 55°C 1K 1 … 7 K adjustable internal setting B
JMT-411 E 6080076 10 … 55°C 1K 1K internal setting B

JMT-211 F JMT-411

Industrial Technology
JMT-21. JMT-21.

JMT-41. JMT-41.

Catalogue 2007 | Page 57


Industry room thermostats JET-30 / -31 / JET-32
Capillary system, outdoor sensor, 2 separated setting ranges, 2 stages
Technical data Application
Switching capacity: JET-30, -31: 15 (8) A, 24–250 V ~, For out- or indoor installation (in non-
min.150 mA at 24 V ~ aggressive environments), particularly
JET-32: 15 (4) A, 24–250 V ~, suited as thermostat for the control of
min.150 mA at 24 V ~ temperatures in industrial-, fair- and
Switching difference: JET-30, -31: 1 K air inflated halls or for cool down
JET-32: 2 K protection in green houses.
Contact: 2 microswitches as potential-free
Two separated setting ranges for
changeover contacts
“heating and cooling” or “heating or
Ambient temperature: – 20 …+ 55°C cooling”.
Degree of protection: IP 65
Protection class: I Type JET-32 specially preadjusted for
control of gutter heating systems.
Sensor: V2A (1.4301)
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016,
upper part RAL 7035)

Type Item No. 1. Control range 2. Control range Equipment PG

JET-30 C 1820200 10 … 45°C (external) TR 0 … 35°C (internal) TW B


JET-31 C 1820201 10 … 45°C (internal) TW 0 … 35°C (internal) TW B
JET-32 C 1820204 – 10 … 40°C – 10 … 40°C 1stcontroller: B
break contact preadjusted to + 5°C
2nd controller:
make contact preadjusted to - 5°C

JET-3. JET-3.

JET-32 JET-32

Catalogue 2007 | Page 58


One-stage capillary thermostat WR 81

Technical data Application


Switching capacity: 15 (8) A, 24–250 V ~, Supervision or control of temperatures in
min. 150 mA at 24 V ~ non-aggressive, liquid or gasiform media.
Specially suited for wall mounting.
Contact: 1 microswitch as potential-free
The protective spiral SW-200 is determi-
changeover contact
ned for use with all temperature control
Ambient temperature: – 20 … + 55°C tasks within non-aggressive types of
gas that flow in conduits, while the dip
Time constant: ca. 30 s sleeve TH is determined for all control
Degree of protection: IP 43 (self-sealing grommet), ex factory tasks within non-aggressive fluids. The
IP 54 (screw connection) application of the dip sleeve type NTH is
required when using the device for the
Protection class: I
control of temperatures in aggressive
Sensor: bulb and capillary tube made of Cu fluids.
Max. sensor temperature: end-scale value + 15 %
Dip sleeves or protective spirals
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016, are not included in the scope of
upper part RAL 7035) the delivery!

Type Item No. Control range Switching difference Sensor Equipment PG

WR 81.029-1 C 1810612 0 … 35°C 0.5 … 1 K 7 x 135 mm internal setting, length of B


capillary tube: 500 mm
WR 81.101-1 C 1810610 0 … 35°C 0.5 … 1 K 7 x 135 mm internal setting, length of B
capillary tube: 2,000 mm
WR 81.009-2 C 1810600 0 … 70°C 1…2 K 7 x 90 mm external setting, length of B
capillary tube: 1,500 mm
WR 81.109-2 C 1810615 0 … 70°C 1…2 K 7 x 90 mm internal setting, length of B
capillary tube: 1,500 mm

Industrial Technology
Accessories

As for dip sleeves (TH-100 / 200 / 280, NTH-100 / 200 / 280) and protective spiral (SW-200) see pages 154 – 156

WR-81.109-2 WR-81

WR-81

Catalogue 2007 | Page 59


One-stage capillary thermostat JET-1 …

Technical data Application


Switching capacity: 15 (8) A, 24–250 V ~, Supervision or control of tempera-
min. 150 mA at 24 V ~ tures in non-aggressive, liquid or
gasiform media. Specially suited for
Contact: 1 microswitch as potential-free wall mounting. The protective spiral
changeover contact SW-200-12 is determined for use with
all temperature control tasks within
Ambient temperature: – 20 … + 55°C
non-aggressive types of gas that flow
Degree of protection: IP 65 in conduits, while the dip sleeve TH is
determined for all control tasks within
Protection class: I non-aggressive fluids. The application
of the dip sleeve type NTH is required
Sensor: bulb made of Cu and capillary tube of
when using the device for the control
V2A
of temperatures in aggressive fluids.
Lenght of capillary: 1.8 m
Dip sleeves or protective spiral are
Max. sensor temperature: end-scale value + 15 % not included in the scope of the
delivery!
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016,
upper part RAL 7035)

Type Item No. Control range Switching difference Sensor dimensions PG


adjustable

JET-110X JA 040100 – 35 … + 30°C 2 … 20 K (TR) 9.6 x 122 mm B


JET-110XF JA 040200 – 35 … + 30°C 2 … 20 K (TW) 9.6 x 122 mm B
JET-110XFG JA 040201 – 35 … + 30°C 2 … 20 K (TW) 9.6 x 122 mm B
JET-112X JA 040300 – 35 … + 30°C TB* 9.6 x 122 mm B
JET-112XF JA 040400 – 35 … + 30°C TB* 9.6 x 122 mm B
JET-120X JA 041100 0 … 60°C 2 … 20 K (TR) 9.6 x 122 mm B
JET-120XG JA 041101 0 … 60°C 2 … 20 K (TR) 9.6 x 122 mm B
JET-120XF JA 041200 0 … 60°C 2 … 20 K (TW) 9.6 x 122 mm B
JET-130X JA 042100 40 … 100°C 2 … 20 K (TR) 9.6 x 122 mm B
JET-130XG JA 042101 40 … 100°C 2 … 20 K (TR) 9.6 x 122 mm B
JET-130XF JA 042200 40 … 100°C 2 … 20 K (TW) 9.6 x 122 mm B
JET-133XF JA 042400 40 … 100°C TB** 9.6 x 122 mm B
JET-140X JA 043100 70 … 130°C 2 … 20 K (TR) 9.6 x 122 mm B
JET-140XF JA 043200 70 … 130°C 2 … 20 K (TW) 9.6 x 122 mm B
JET-143XF JA 043400 70 … 130°C TB** 9.6 x 122 mm B
JET-150 JA 044100 100 … 280°C 8 … 50 K (TR) 6 x 80 mm B
JET-150F JA 044200 100 … 280°C 8 … 50 K (TW) 6 x 80 mm B
JET-153 JA 044300 100 … 280°C TB** 6 x 80 mm B
JET-153F JA 044400 100 … 280°C TB** 6 x 80 mm B
Option: screwed cable gland M 20 x 1.5 (Standard M 16 x 1.5) B

F = Internal setting TR = Temperature controller


G = Device with 4.5 m long capillary TW = Temperature monitor
X = Types for TH / NTH-140 TB = Temperature limiter

* Locks at falling temperatures


Manual reset after a temperature increase of min. 8 K
** Locks at rising temperatures
Manual reset after a temperature decrease of min. 8 K

Accessories

Protective spiral and dip sleeves (for further details see pages 154 – 156)
Dip sleeves are not included in the scope of the delivery!
For all types with an ”X” in the type designation code: TH / NTH-140
For all types without an ”X” in the type designation code: TH / NTH-100 / 200 / 280

Catalogue 2007 | Page 60


One-stage capillary thermostat JET-1 …

JET-120 XF JET-112 X

JET-1.. TR / TW

Industrial Technology
TB

Catalogue 2007 | Page 61


Multistage thermostat JMT-2
Two stages
Technical data Application
Switching capacity: 15 (8) A, 24–250 V ~, Multistage control of temperatures in
min. 150 mA at 24 V ~ liquid or gasiform media, e.g. for the
Contact: 2 microswitches as potential-free triggering of two-stage burners or coil
changeover contacts heating systems.
Ambient temperature: – 15 … + 55°C
The protective spiral SW-200-12 is
Degree of protection: IP 65 determined for use with all tempera-
Protection class: I ture control tasks within non-
Sensor: bulb and capillary tube made of Cu aggressive types of gas that flow in
conduits, while the dip sleeve TH is
Lenght of capillary: 1.5 m
determined for all control tasks within
Max. sensor temperature: end-scale value + 15 % non-aggressive fluids. The application
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016, of the dip sleeve type NTH is required
upper part RAL 7035) when using the device for the control
of temperatures in aggressive fluids.

Dip sleeves or protective spirals


are not included in the scope of the
delivery!

Type Item No. Control range Switching difference Switching difference Sensor dimensions PG
within the stage limits between the stages

JMT-202 X E 6060011 – 15 … 30°C 1K 1 … 7 K adjustable 9.6 x 122 mm B


JMT-203 X E 6060023 10 … 55°C 1K 1 … 7 K adjustable 9.6 x 122 mm B
JMT-203 XF E 6060439 10 … 55°C 1K 1 … 7 K adjustable 9.6 x 122 mm B
JMT-221 X E 6060062 10 … 55°C 3K 1 … 7 K adjustable 9.6 x 122 mm B
JMT-204 E 6060035 50 … 120°C 1K 1 … 7 K adjustable 8 x 78 mm B
F = internal setting

Accessories

Protective spiral (SW-200-12) and dip sleeves (or further detail see pages 154 – 156)
For types with an “X” in the type designation code: TH / NTH-140; for types without an “X” in the type designation code: TH / NTH-100 / 200 / 280

JMT-2.. JMT-2..

Catalogue 2007 | Page 62


Rod thermostat for use as ventilation control LR 80
Capillary system – TÜV-tested

Technical data Application


Switching capacity: 15 (8) A, 24–250 V ~, Specially suited for supply air moni-
min. 150 mA at 24 V ~ toring purposes in the ventilation-
Contact: 1 microswitch as potential-free engineering field or as limiter for the
changeover contact limitation of temperatures developed
by electrical coil heating systems.
Ambient temperature: – 20 … + 55°C
Degree of protection: IP 43 (optional: IP 54) The protective spiral is included in
Protection class: I the scope of the delivery.
Sensor: liquid filled sensing element made of Cu
Protective spiral: nickel-plated steel For the ordering of SWK spare spi-
rals, please choose from the types
Max. sensor temperature: end-scale value + 15 % listed on page 154.
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016,
upper part RAL 7035)
TÜV type tested acc. to DIN 3440 for up to 95°C. Reg. No.: TR / TW 107601
TÜV type test acc. to DIN EN 14597 currently performed

Type Item No. Control Switching Length of pro- Equipment* PG


range difference (approx.) tective spiral

LR 80.003-1 C 1801800 0 … 35°C 1K 120 mm external setting / TR B


LR 80.108-1 C 1801801 0 … 35°C 1K 120 mm internal setting / TW B
LR 80.109-1 C 1801810 0 … 35°C 1K 200 mm internal setting / TW B
LR 80.027-5 C 1801806 0 … 70°C 5K 100 mm external setting / TR B
LR 80.035-2 C 1801824 0 … 70°C 2K 100 mm external setting / TR B
LR 80.028-2 C 1801807 0 … 70°C 2K 200 mm external setting / TR B

Industrial Technology
LR 80.116-2 C 1801811 0 … 70°C 2K 100 mm internal setting / TW B
LR 80.029-2 C 1801816 0 … 70°C 2K 280 mm external setting / TR B
LR 80.120-1 C 1801812 10 … 45°C 1K 200 mm internal setting / TW B
LR 80.207 C 1801805 60 … 95°C 100 mm internal setting / external reset / TB B
LR 80.203 C 1801825 95 … 130°C 200 mm internal setting / external reset / TB B
Option: IP 54 B
* TR = Temperature controller, TW = Temperature monitor, TB = Temperature limiter (manual reset after cooling down by min. 8 K)

LR 80.108-1 LR 80. … LR 80.2..

LR 80. … LR 80. … (TR / TW) LR 80.2.. (TB)

Catalogue 2007 | Page 6


Rod thermostat for use as boiler controller KR 80
Capillary system – TÜV tested
Technical data Application
Switching capacity: 15 (8) A, 24–250 V ~, Specially suited for applications in
min. 150 mA at 24 V ~ the heating technology sphere or for
Contact: 1 microswitch as potential-free use in heat reservoirs, district heating
changeover contact transfer stations or heat transfer
installations.
Ambient temperature: – 20 … + 55°C
Degree of protection: IP 43 (optional: IP 54) The dip sleeve is included in the
Protection class: I scope of the delivery.
Sensor: liquid filled sensing element made
of Cu For the ordering of THK/NTHK spare
dip sleeves, please choose from the
Dip sleeve: nickel-plated brass (ex factory)
types listed on page 154.
optional: V4A (1.4571)
Max. sensor temperature: end-scale value + 15 %
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016,
upper part RAL 7035)
TÜV type tested acc. to DIN 3440 for up to 95°C. Reg. Nr.: TR / TW 107601
TÜV type test acc. to DIN EN 14597 currently performed

Type Item No. Control Switching Length of Equipment* PG


range difference dip sleeve
(approx.)

KR 80.003-1 C 1801726 0 … 35°C 1K 120 mm external setting / TR B


KR 80.108-1 C 1801707 0 … 35°C 1K 120 mm internal setting / TW B
KR 80.109-1 C 1801744 0 … 35°C 1K 200 mm internal setting / TW B
KR 80.027-5 C 1801731 0 … 70°C 5K 100 mm external setting / TR B
KR 80.035-2 C 1801705 0 … 70°C 2K 100 mm external setting / TR B
KR 80.028-2 C 1801732 0 … 70°C 2K 200 mm external setting / TR B
KR 80.116-2 C 1801748 0 … 70°C 2K 100 mm internal setting / TW B
KR 80.029-2 C 1801733 0 … 70°C 2K 280 mm external setting / TR B
KR 80.111-3 C 1801708 0 … 80°C 3K 100 mm internal setting / TW B
KR 80.009-1 C 1801728 10 … 45°C 1K 200 mm / V4A external setting / TR B
KR 80.011-1 C 1801730 10 … 45°C 1K 120 mm / V4A external setting / TR B
KR 80.120-1 C 1801749 10 … 45°C 1K 200 mm internal setting / TW B
KR 80.206 C 1801720 30 … 65°C 100 mm internal setting / external reset / TB B
KR 80.000-5 C 1801700 35 … 95°C 5K 100 mm external setting / TR B
KR 80.001-5 C 1801723 35 … 95°C 5K 200 mm external setting / TR B
KR 80.100-5 C 1801711 35 … 95°C 5K 100 mm internal setting / TW B
KR 80.101-5 C 1801739 35 … 95°C 5K 200 mm internal setting / TW B
KR 80.124-5 C 1801750 35 … 95°C 5K 280 mm internal setting / TW B
KR 80.112-5 C 1801747 35 … 95°C 5K 600 mm internal setting / TW B
KR 80.102-8 C 1801706 40 … 110°C 8K 100 mm internal setting / TW B
KR 80.103-8 C 1801742 40 … 110°C 8K 200 mm internal setting / TW B
KR 80.008-8 C 1801727 40 … 110°C 8K 100 mm external setting / TR B
KR 80.006-8 C 1801704 50 … 130°C 8K 100 mm external setting / TR B
KR 80.106-8 C 1801743 50 … 130°C 8K 100 mm internal setting / TW B
KR 80.207 C 1801710 60 … 95°C 100 mm internal setting / external reset / TB B
KR 80.208 C 1801721 85 … 120°C 100 mm internal setting / external reset / TB B
KR 80.202 C 1801709 95 … 130°C 100 mm internal setting / external reset / TB B
KR 80.203 C 1801719 95 … 130°C 200 mm internal setting / external reset / TB B
Option: IP 54 B
* TR = Temperature controller, TW = Temperature monitor, TB = Temperature limiter (manual reset after cooling down by min. 8 K)

Catalogue 2007 | Page 6


Rod thermostat for use as boiler controller KR 80
Capillary system – TÜV tested
KR 80.108-1 KR 80.207

KR 80. … KR 80. … KR 80.2..

Industrial Technology
KR 80. … (TR / TW) KR 80.2.. (TB)

Catalogue 2007 | Page 65


Rod thermostat for use as Safety temperature limiter KR 80.3 / LR 80.3
Capillary system – TÜV tested
Technical data Application
Switching capacity: 10 (3) A, 24–250 V ~, For the limitation of temperatures in
min.150 mA at 24 V ~ boiler-, heat reservoir- and ventilating
Contact: 1 microswitch as potential-free systems.
changeover contact
STB = Safety temperature limiter,
Ambient temperature: – 20 … + 55°C
switch-off temperature fixly adjusted
Degree of protection: IP 43 (optional: IP 54) ex works.
Protection class: I
Sensor: bulb and capillary tube made of V2A Temperature decrease required until
to unlocking: min. 20 K.
Dip sleeve: nickel-plated brass (ex factory),
optional: V4A (1.4571) Dip sleeve or protective spiral are
Protective spiral: nickel-plated steel included in the scope of the delivery.
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016,
upper part RAL 7035) As for the ordering of THK/NTHK
spare dip sleeves or of protective
Sensor breakdown protec- responds at approx. – 15°C SWK spare spirals, please choose
tion: from the types listed on page 154.
Equipment: internal reset
TÜV type tested acc. to DIN 3440, Reg. no.: KR – STB 912 01 / LR – STB 915 01
TÜV type test acc. to DIN EN 14597 currently performed

Image Type Item No. Switch-off Max. sensor Length of dip sleeve / PG
temperature temperature protective spiral

KR 80.309 C 1801590 75°C + 0 / – 8 K 115°C 100 mm B

KR 80.310 C 1801591 75°C + 0 / – 8 K 115°C 200 mm B

KR 80.312 C 1801592 100°C + 0 / – 9 K 135°C 100 mm B

KR 80.318 C 1801593 100°C + 0 / – 9 K 135°C 200 mm B

LR 80.309 C 1801821 75°C + 0 / – 8 K 115°C 100 mm B

LR 80.310 C 1801822 75°C + 0 / – 8 K 115°C 200 mm B

LR 80.312 C 1801823 100°C + 0 / – 9 K 135°C 100 mm B

LR 80.318 C 1801817 100°C + 0 / – 9 K 135°C 200 mm B


Option: IP 54 (degree of protection) B

KR 80.3.. LR 80.3.. KR 80.3.. / LR 80.3.. STB

Catalogue 2007 | Page 66


Rod thermostat for use as boiler double controller KR 85
Capillary system – TÜV tested
Technical data Application
Switching capacity: 15 (8) A, 24 – 250 V ~, Specially suited for the use in the
at 24 V ~, min.150 mA heating technology sphere in boiler
Contact: 2 microswitches as potential-free systems or heat reservoir installa-
changeover contacts tions, district heating transfer stations
or heat transfer installations.
Ambient temperature: – 20 … + 55°C
Max. sensor temperature: end-scale value + 15 % The dip sleeve is included in the
Degree of protection: IP 43 (optional: IP 54) scope of the delivery.
Protection class: I
As for the ordering of THK...x17/
FSensor: liquid filled sensing element
NTHK...x17 spare dip sleeves, please
made of Cu
choose from the types listed on page
Dip sleeve: nickel-plated brass (ex factory) 154..
optional: V4A (1.4571)
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016,
upper part RAL 7035)
TÜV type tested acc. to DIN 3440 KR 85.1 … Reg. no.: TR / TW 109302
KR 85.4 … Reg. no.: TW / TW 109402
TÜV type test acc. to DIN EN 14597 currently performed

Type Item No. Control range: / Switching Length of dip Equipment PG


switch-off temperature difference sleeve

KR 85.406-2 C 1850506 0 … 70°C 2K 100 mm internal setting / TW B


0 … 70°C 2K internal setting / TW
KR 85.109-2 C 1850518 0 … 70°C 2K 100 mm external setting / TR B
0 … 70°C 2K internal setting / TW
KR 85.100-5 C 1850502 35 … 95°C 3–5 K, fixed 100 mm external setting / TR B

Industrial Technology
35 … 95°C 3–5 K, fixed Inneneinstellung / TW
KR 85.101-5 C 1850516 35 … 95°C 3–5 K, fixed 200 mm external setting / TR B
35 … 95°C 3–5 K, fixed internal setting / TW
KR 85.400-5 C 1850521 35 … 95°C 3–5 K, fixed 100 mm internal setting / TW B
35 … 95°C 3–5 K, fixed internal setting / TW
KR 85.401-5 C 1850522 35 … 95°C 3–5 K, fixed 200 mm internal setting / TW B
35 … 95°C 3–5 K, fixed internal setting / TW
KR 85.102-5 C 1850517 35 … 95°C 3–5 K, fixed 100 mm external setting / TR B
50 … 130°C 8K internal setting / TW
KR 85.207-5 C 1850513 35 … 95°C 3–5 K, fixed 200 mm external setting / TR B
85 … 120°C external reset / TB
KR 85.230-5 C 1850504 35 … 95°C 3–5 K, fixed 100 mm external setting / TR B
95 … 110°C internal reset / TB
KR 85.204-8 C 1850512 50 … 130°C 6–8 K, fixed 100 mm external setting / TR B
95 … 130°C external reset / TB
Option: IP 54 (protection class) B
TR = Temperature controller, TW = Temperature monitor, TB = Temperature limiter (manual reset after cooling down by min. 8 K)

KR 85.4.. KR 85. … KR 85. …

KR 85. … KR 85.2…

Catalogue 2007 | Page 67


Rod thermostat for use as boiler controller / Safety temperature limiter
KR 85.3 / LR 85.3
Capillary system – TÜV tested
Technical data Application
Switching capacity: 10 (3) A, 24–250 V ~, For the limitation of temperatures in
min. 150 mA at 24 V ~ boiler-, heat reservoir and ventilating
Contact: 2 microswitches as potential-free systems.
changeover contacts STB = Safety temperature limiter,
switch-off temperature fixly adjusted
Ambient temperature: – 20 … + 55°C
ex works.
Max. sensor temperature: end-scale value + 15 % Temperature decrease required until
Degree of protection: IP 43 (optional: IP 54) to unlocking: min. 20 K.
Protection class: I Dip sleeve or protective spiral are
included in the scope of the delivery.
Sensor: bulb and capillary tube made of
Cu and V2A (STB
As for the ordering of THK...x17/
Dip sleeve: nickel-plated brass (ex factory) NTHK...x17 spare dip sleeves or of
optional: V4A (1.4571) protective SWK-200 spare spirals,
Protective spiral: nickel-plated steel please choose from the types listed
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016, on page 154.
upper part RAL 7035)
TÜV type tested acc. to DIN 3440, Reg. no.: TR / STB 91301
TÜV type test acc. to DIN EN 14597 currently performed

Type Item No. Control range: / switch- Switching Length ofdip sleeve / Equipment PG
off temperature difference protective spiral

KR 85.311-2 C 1850507 0 … 70°C 2K 100 mm external setting / TR B


STB 75°C + 0 / – 8 K internal reset / STB
KR 85.312-2 C 1850519 0 … 70°C 2K 200 mm external setting / TR B
STB 75°C + 0 / – 8 K internal reset / STB
KR 85.314-5 C 1850520 35 … 90°C 5K 100 mm external setting / TR B
STB 100°C + 0 / – 9 K internal reset / STB
KR 85.315-5 C 1850505 35 … 90°C 5K 200 mm external setting / TR B
STB 100°C + 0 / – 9 K internal reset / STB
LR 85.315-5 C 1850530 35 … 90°C 5K 200 mm external setting / TR B
STB 100°C + 0 / – 9 K internal reset / STB
Option: IP 54 (degree of protection) B

TR = Temperature controller, STB = Safety temperature limiter

LR 85.315-5 KR 85.3.. KR 85.3.. / LR 85.3..

KR 85.3.. / LR 85.3..

Catalogue 2007 | Page 68


Duct thermostat JTU-1 … -50
Capillary system – TÜV tested

Technical data Application


Switching capacity: 15 (8) A, 24 –250 V ~, Specially suited as minimum- or
min. 150 mA at 24 V ~ maximum value thermostat for supply
Contact: 1 microswitch as potential-free air control purposes or for the control
changeover contact of fans in ventilating and air conditio-
ning systems
Ambient temperature: – 15 … + 80°C
Degree of protection: IP 40 Also suited as overheat protection
Protection class: I thermostat for the application with
Sensor: liquid filled sensing element made of electrical coil heating systems and
Cu, active on its entire length direct fired oil- or gas air heaters.
Max. sensor temperature: 200°C
Colour: grey
JTU-2 / -3 / -20: TÜV type tested acc. to DIN 3440, Reg. no.: STB 65901
Type test with regard to air heaters performed in acc. with DIN 4794
TÜV type test acc. to DIN EN 14597 currently performed

Type Item No. Range Switching difference Type* Lenght of Equipment PG


capillary

JTU-50 E 6100000 – 25 … + 65°C 1.5 K TW 350 mm D


JTU-1 E 6100012 20 … 100°C 8 … 30 K, adjustable TW 350 mm intrinsic safety / cold protection D

JTU-2 E 6100024 20 … 100°C external manual reset STB 350 mm intrinsic safety / cold protection D
JTU-3 E 6100036 20 … 100°C external manual reset STB 350 mm intrinsic safety / cold and D
overheat protection
JTU-20 E 6100075 20 … 100°C external manual reset STB 1250 mm intrinsic safety / cold protection D

Industrial Technology
JTU-5 E 6100048 60 … 140°C 8 … 30 K, adjustable TW 350 mm D
JTU-6 E 6100051 60 … 140°C external manual reset TB 350 mm D
* TW = Temperature monitor, STB = Safety temperature limiter, TB = Temperature limiter
** Intrinsic safety / cold protection: The devices are fail-safe, scilicet the burner is deactivated in the event the medium filled into the sensors leaks
out or escapes, such as in the case of a sensor breakdown. The devices are, by reason of the fact that the minus temperatures do induce a reduction
of the volume of the filled medium, which in turn results in the same effect as in the event of a sensor breakdown (leakage or loss of medium) ad-
justed by means of a so-called “cold screw” in such manner that the deactivation of the burner is triggered only at temperatures below –15°C. Their
reactivation can be effected only at temperatures above approx. –5°C by actuating the manual reset key.
Overheat protection: The device protects against uncontrolled overheating that, for example, can be caused by heat build-ups or through the
creeping loss of the medium filled into the capillary tube in the event of invisible damages to the sensor or the capillary tube, etc. The safety solder in
the sensor fuses upon the attaining of a temperature of 220°C to the result that the device deactivates, initiated through the loss of the medium filled
into the capillary tube, the burner towards the safe side. Once this has happened, the burner can no longer be reactivated. The device can no longer
be used then. Once this has happened, the used up device serves for proof only that an excess temperature of at least 220°C was present.

JTU-20 JTU

JTU-50 / -1 / -5 JTU-2 / -3 / -20 / -6

Catalogue 2007 | Page 69


Air heater thermostat JTL-2 … -11 / JTL-4 NR … -17 NR
Capillary system, 2 or 3 functions – TÜV tested
Technical data Application
Switching capacity: 15 (8) A, 24 – 250 V ~, For use as minimum- or maximum
min.150 mA at 24 V ~ value thermostat for supply air control
Control range fan: 20 … 70°C purposes or for the control of fans
in ventilating and air-conditioning
Control range burner: 70 … 100°C, JTL-2 … -11
systems. Also suited as overheat pro-
70 … 95°C, JTL-4 NR … -17 NR
tection thermostat for the application
Switch-off temperature STB: 100°C, external manual reset with electrical heating coils and direct
(applies to types JTL – …NR) fired oil- or gas air heaters.
Contact: 2 or 3 microswitches as potential-free
changeover contacts The switch “MAN – AUTO” enables to
Degree of protection: IP 40 use the fan for ventilating purposes
during summer.
Protection class: I
Ambient temperature: – 15 … + 80°C Type … no.: For the temperature-
Sensor: liquid filled sensing element made of operated control of fans, the monitor-
Cu, active over its entire length ing of burners and use as Safety
temperature limiter (three functions).
Max. sensor temperature: 200°C
Colour: grey
TÜV type tested acc. to DIN 3440 (TÜV type test acc. to DIN EN 14597 currently performed)
JTL-2 … 11: Reg. no.: TW 65701 / STB 65801
JTL-4NR … 17NR: Reg. no.: TW / STB 70101
Type test with regard to air heaters performed in acc. with DIN 4794

Type Item No. Switching difference Switching dif- Type* Lenght of Equipment** PG
fan, adjustable ference burner capillary

JTL-2 E 6110013 8 … 30 K 8K TW 350 mm intrinsic safety / D


cold protection
JTL-4 E 6110037 8 … 30 K external manual STB 350 mm intrinsic safety / D
reset cold protection
JTL-8 E 6110049 8 … 30 K external manual STB 350 mm intrinsic safety / D
reset cold- and over-
heat protection
JTL-11 E 6110064 8 … 30 K 8K TW 1250 mm intrinsic safety / D
cold protection
JTL-4 NR E 6120180 8 … 30 K 8K TW / STB 350 mm intrinsic safety / D
cold protection
JTL-8 NR E 6120038 8 … 30 K 8K TW / STB 350 mm intrinsic safety / D
cold- and over-
heat protection
JTL-17 NR E 6120077 8 … 30 K 8K TW / STB 1.250 mm intrinsic safety / D
cold- and over-
heat protection
* TW = Thermostat, STB = Safety temperature limiter
** As for explanations, see page 69 (JTU-1 … – 50)

JTL-17 NR JTL-2

Catalogue 2007 | Page 70


Air heater thermostat JTL-2 … -11 / JTL-4 NR … -17 NR
Capillary system, 2 or 3 functions – TÜV tested
JTL- .. NR JTL- .. NR

JTL- .. JTL .. (TW)

Industrial Technology
JTL- . (STB)

Catalogue 2007 | Page 71


Clip-on thermostats ATR 83, JAT-1 …, WR 81
Capillary system
Technical data Application
Switching capacity: ATR 83: 16 (2) A, 24–250 V ~, Specially suited for the control or
min. 150 mA at 24 V ~ supervision of temperatures at coil
WR 81: 15 (8) A, 24–250 V ~, heating systems, pipelines, containers
min. 150 mA at 24 V ~ or reservoirs to enable for example the
JAT …: 15 (8) A, 24–250 V ~, temperature-dependent driving and
min. 150 mA at 24 V ~ control of pumps or the actuation of
Switching difference: ATR 83 + WR 81: 4 K motor valves.
JAT …: 2 … 20 K, adjustable
Contact: 1 microswitch as potential-free
changeover contact
Degree of protection: ATR 83: IP 20, WR 81: IP 43,
JAT …: IP 65
Protection class: I
Ambient temperature: ATR 83 + WR 81: 0 … 80°C,
JAT …: – 20 … + 55°C
Sensor: ATR 83 + JAT …: liquid filled sensing
element made of Cu
WR 81: liquid filled sensing element
made of Cu, silicone pads for ideal heat
transfer

Fastening: ATR 83: cable straps, 450 x 8.9 mm


(included in the scope of the delivery),
removable, heat resistant up to 105°C
WR 81 + JAT …: 200 mm long tighte-
ning strap, (included in the scope of
the delivery)

Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016,


upper part RAL 7035)

Type Item No. Control range Max. sensor temperature Equipment PG

ATR 83.000 C 1810492 30 … 90°C 100°C external setting / TR B


ATR 83.100 C 1810493 30 … 90°C 100°C internal setting / TW B
ATR 83.001 C 1810494 0 … 60°C 80°C external setting / TR B
ATR 83.101 C 1810495 0 … 60°C 80°C Inneneinstellung / TW B
Accessories: ATRS-1 temperature fixing set (for ATR 83.000 / ATR 83.001), C 1809518 K

Type Item No. Control range Max. sensor temperature Equipment PG

WR 81.115-5 C 1810617 0 … 70°C 85°C internal setting / TW B


WR 81.117-5 C 1810613 50 … 130°C 150°C internal setting / TW B

Type Item No. Control range Max. sensor temperature Equipment PG

JAT-110 F JA 030200 – 35 … + 30°C end-scale value + 15 °C internal setting / TW B


JAT-120 F JA 030500 0 … 60°C end-scale value + 15 °C internal setting / TW B
JAT-130 F JA 030700 40 … 100°C end-scale value + 15 °C internal setting / TW B
Option: screwed cable gland M 20 x 1.5 (standard: M 16 x 1.5) B

TR = Temperature controller, TW = Thermostat

Catalogue 2007 | Page 72


Clip-on thermostats ATR 83, JAT-1 …, WR 81
Capillary system

ATR 83. … ATR 83. …

JAT-1.. JAT-1..

Industrial Technology
WR 81.11. WR 81.11.

Catalogue 2007 | Page 73


Frost protection thermostat JTF-1 … -25
Capillary system, 1 or 2 stages, TÜV tested, switching type
Technical data Application

Switching difference: 15 (8) A, 24–250 V ~, Especially suited to ensure the protection of


min.150 mA at 24 V ~ hot water coil heating systems against free-
zing. The frost protection thermostat models
Switching difference: 1K JTF-21 to JTF-25 are equipped with two swit-
Control range: – 10 … + 12°C ching outputs that provide the option to act on
the system already in advance of the attaining
Contact: 1 or 2 microswitches as potential-free
of the corresponding danger point. All devices
changeover contacts
are fail-safe and dispose of a lead-sealable set
Degree of protection: IP 40, W types: IP 65 value setting facility.
Protection class: I
In each case, the capillary tubes are active
Ambient device – 10 … + 55°C, 1 or 2 microswitches as over their entire length. The device responds
temperature: potential-free changeover contacts if the adjusted scale value is attained over a
length of approx. 30 cm 60 cm respectively
Ambient temperature: max. 200°C
(with 12 m variants).
Sensor: gas-filled, made of Cu,
active over its entire length JTF-1 bis -25:
Specially suited for the measuring of tempe-
Colour: grey (RAL 7035) JTF- … W: grey ratures in non-aggressive gases. The bracing
of the capillary tubes in front of the coil
heating system can be realised by means of
TÜV type tested acc. to DIN 3440 installation clips (JZ-05 / 6M (metal) or JZ-05 /
Reg. no.: TW 65401 (JTF-1, -3, -5), STB 65501 (JTF-2, -4, -6) 06 K (plastic).
TÜV type test acc. to DIN EN 14597 currently performed
JTF-3 / -4 (additional application):
The protective spiral SW-200-12 is determined
for use with all temperature measuring tasks
within non-aggressive types of gas that flow
Note: in conduits, while the dip sleeve TH-140 is
The installation clips, the dip sleeves and the protective spiral are not determined for all m easuring tasks within
included in the scope of the delivery and need to be ordered sepera- non-aggressive fluids. The application of the
tely. dip sleeve type NTH-140 is required when
using the device for the measuring of tempe-
ratures in aggressive fluids.

Type Item No. Lenght of capillary Equipment Sensor bulb PG

One-stage
JTF-1 E 6090301 6.0 m C

JTF-1 / 12 E 6090328 12.0 m C

JTF-1W E 6090014 6.0 m IP 65 C

JTF-2 E 6090308 6.0 m external manual reset C

JTF-2 / 12 E 6090329 12.0 m external manual reset C

JTF-3 E 6090309 1.8 m also for use on the water side 9.5 x 76 mm C

JTF-3 W E 6090065 1.8 m IP 65, also for use on the water side 9.5 x 76 mm C

JTF-4 E 6090310 1.8 m external manual reset, also for use on the water side 9.5 x 76 mm C

JTF-5 E 6090311 3.0 m C

JTF-6 E 6090040 3.0 m external manual reset C

2-stage: 1st stage emits a signal at 5 K before the attaining of the switch-off point
JTF-21 E 6090320 6.0 m C

JTF-21 / 12 E 6090330 12.0 m C

JTF-21W E 6090283 6.0 m IP 65 C

JTF-22 E 6090322 6.0 m external manual reset C

JTF-22 / 12 E 6090321 12.0 m external manual reset C

JTF-25 E 6090324 3.0 m C

Accessories: Installation clips (page 159 – 160), dip sleeves (page 156), protective spiral (page 154)

Catalogue 2007 | Page 7


Frost protection thermostat JTF-1 … -25
Capillary system, 1 or 2 stages, TÜV tested , switching type
JTF JTF- .. W

JTF-22, JTF-21, JTF-25 Interior view

Industrial Technology
JTF-1 / -3 / -5 JTF-2 / -4 / -6

JTF-21 / -25 JTF-22

Catalogue 2007 | Page 75


Frost protection thermostat JTF-31, JTF-35 NEW
Continuous and switching
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 15 … 36 V = / 24 V ~ For the supervision and protection
Measuring range: 0 … 15°C of hot water coil heating systems or
heat exchangers installed in venti-
Output (continuous): 0 … 10 V (corresponds to 0 … 15°C)
lating-, heating or air conditioning
Output (switching): setting range 0 … 10 °C system. Also suited for the measuring
Switching capacity: 1 (0.2) A, max. 30 V ~ / 120 V =, of temperatures in non-aggressive
safety extra low voltage (SELV) types of gas.
Switching difference
of the switching output: approx. 2 K The bracing of the capillary tubes in
front of the coil heating system can
Contact: 1 relay as potential-free changeover be realised by means of installation
contact clips (JZ-05 / 6M (metal) or JZ-05 / 06
Switching difference ± 1.0 K (at 10°C) K (plastic).
of the switching output:
Ambient temperature: Capillary tube: -20 … + 110°C Installation clips are not included in
(capillary tube > 20 cm away from the the scope of the delivery and need
housing) to be ordered seperately
Housing: -15 … + 50°C (see page 159 to160).
Degree of protection: IP 65
Protection class: III
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016,
upper part RAL 7035)

Type Item No. Continuous and switching Equipment PG

JTF-31 G 8000404 6.0 m 0 – 10 V output and changeover contact J

JTF-35 G 8000405 3.0 m 0 – 10 V output and changeover contact J

Accessories PG

JTF-H G 8000406 Heating resistor J

Functional description: The temperature sensed within a range from 0 … + 15°C is being translated into a voltage signal of 0 to 10 V and being output.
This voltage is made available at the terminal “Temp”. An internal setting facility provides the option to adjust the switching point of a potential-free chan-
geover contact within a range from 0 … + 10°C in addition. In the event this switching point is underrun, the relay output switches over to “frost protec-
tion” (contact “W” connected with contact “B”). An internal plug-in bridge enables to select between the operating modes “automatic” or “manual”. In the
event the temperature rises by more than 2 K above the adjusted switching point, the device changes, while operating in automatic mode, over to normal
mode operation. In this case, the relay drops back to its initial position (contact “W” connected with contact “A”). If the temperature rise by more than 2
K occurs while operating in manual mode, the internal reset key must be actuated manually to trigger a reset or simply by disconnecting the operating
voltage supply manually (relay drops back to its initial position, the contact “W” is connected with contact “A”). The control input “ST-E” enables to effect
a displacement of the characteristic curve.

Caution: The capillary sensor is active over its entire length. The device responds if the capillary sensor senses the temperature change over a distance of
approx. 25 cm.
Heating resistor: The housing of the frost protection thermostat must be mounted in such manner that it is not exposed to any temperatures below the
adjusted switching threshold “FS” (frost protection) or that it is, over the entire length of its capillary sensor, not exposed to any temperatures below the
admissible minimum temperature, as this would trigger a false trip. If it was impossible to avert the described condition, the heating resistor JTF-H (to be
ordered separately) needs to be fitted between the operating voltage terminals.

JTF-31 / 35 JTF-31 / 35

Catalogue 2007 | Page 76


Wet room temperature thermostat / double thermostat PTR 40 / 45
Bimetal
Technical data Application
Switching capacity: 250 V ~, 50 / 60 Hz Control and supervision of
Changeover contact: heating: 10 (4) A, temperatures prevailing at certain
cooling: 5 (2) A open spaces, such as driveways
or wet rooms (green houses,
Temperature range: – 20 … + 30°C
halls, warehouses, basement
Switching difference: approx. 2 K rooms, garages, etc.) and for the
Degree of protection: IP 65 control of gutter heating systems.
Protection class: II
Installation / mounting: surface installation, independent
of position
Admissible ambient temperature: – 20 … + 60°C
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016,
upper part RAL 7035)
Housing material: plastic (ABS)

Type Item No. Control range Equipment PG

PTR 40.000 A 201410 – 20 … + 30°C changeover contact, thermal recirculation A


PTR 45.000 A 201413 – 20 … + 30°C changeover contact, thermal recirculation A
(1st controller)
changeover contact, thermal recirculation
– 20 … + 30°C (2nd controller)

PTR 4

Industrial Technology

Catalogue 2007 | Page 77


Temperature difference thermostat ETR 78
Electronic thermo controller with remote sensor
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 250 V ~, 50 / 60 Hz Acquisition of the temperature differential bet-
Switching capacity: 10 (3) A at 250 V ~, ween two independent NTC sensors. Mainly
50 / 60 Hz suited for use with solar heating systems for
the triggering of the circulating pump. Also
Contact: changeover contact
suited for control of heating and service water
Ambient temperature: 0 … 55°C pumps, valves or heat pumps in dependence
Degree of protection: IP 65 on a certain temperature difference.
Protection class: II
Sensors are not included in the scope of
Mounting / installation: wall mounting, independent of the delivery (for choice of sensors available,
position see as of page 99).
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016,
upper part RAL 7035) Application of sensor types according to
sensor no. indicated (i.e. all no. 5 / 25 sensor
types can be used, e.g. HF-5, LF-25 or AF-5,
etc.). Two sensors need to be ordered per
device.

Avoid parallel laying of sensor line and mains


supply cables or protect it by shielding.

Type Item No. Control range ∆t Switching difference Sensor PG

ETR 78.005 D 4780041 35 … 95°C 1 … 20 K 0.1 … 2 K 5 / 25 (NTC 50 K) E


ETR 78.006 D 4780080 0 … 60°C 1 … 20 K 0.1 … 2 K 3 / 23 (NTC 8 K) E

ETR 78 ETR 78

Catalogue 2007 | Page 78


Compact thermostat for installation in switch cabinets (on DIN rail) ITR 79
Electronic thermo controller with remote sensor
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 250 V ~, 50 / 60 Hz Control and supervision of tempera-
Switching capacity: 24–250 V ~ tures in halls, green houses and of
make contact: 10 (3) A, temperatures developed by floor hea-
break contact: 5 (1.5) A ting systems. The devices dispose of
a sensor breakdown and short-circuit
Contact: 1 relay as potential-free changeover
protection.
contact
Switching difference: adjustable 0.5 … 5 K, Sensors are not included in the
except ITR 79.600, scope of the delivery (except ITR
ITR 79.608, ITR 79.503 79.804, ITR 79.805, ITR 79.608).
Ambient temperature: – 10 … + 40°C (For choice of sensors available,
Degree of protection: IP 20 see as of page 99).
Protection class: II
Application of sensor types according
Mode indication: red LED: heating to sensor no. indicated (i.e. all no. 24
green LED: cooling or 4 sensor types can be used, e.g.
Mounting / installation: on DIN rail (35 mm) HF-4, LF-24, etc.). Avoid parallel la-
Electrical connections: terminal screws, max. 2.5 mm2 ying of sensor line and mains supply
cables or protect it by shielding.
Colour: grey (RAL 7035)

Type Item No. Control range Equipment Sensor PG

ITR 79.402 D 4780167 – 35 … + 15°C heating, red LED 1 / 21 (NTC 1 K) A


ITR 79.404 D 4780155 0 … 60°C heating, red LED 4 / 24 (NTC 10 K) A
ITR 79.405 D 4780181 35 … 95°C heating, red LED 5 / 25 (NTC 50 K) A
ITR 79.406 D 4780205 70 … 130°C heating, red LED 6 (NTC 100 K) A

Industrial Technology
ITR 79.408 D 4780179 – 10 … + 40°C heating, red LED 3 / 23 (NTC 8 K) A
ITR 79.503 D 4780524 0 … 11°C frost protection, manual reset, 0 / 20 (NTC 2 K 25) A
switching difference: 1.5 K, fixed
red LED (sensor short-circuit at 75°C)
ITR 79.504 D 4780371 0 … 60°C cooling, green LED 4 / 24 (NTC 10 K) A
ITR 79.508 D 4780369 – 10 … + 40°C cooling, green LED 3 / 23 (NTC 8 K) A

Two reference setters (e.g. for day / night temperature control via external clock) PG

ITR 79.600 D 4780508 2 x 5 … 30°C heating, switching difference: 0.5 K fixed 2 (NTC 47 K) A
ITR 79.608 D 4780558 2 x – 10 … + 40°C heating, switching difference: 0.5 K, fixed 8 (NTC 2 K) A
incl. sensor HF-8 / 4-K2 (4 m)

For remote sensor triggered control of electric floor heating systems PG

ITR 79.804 D 4780545 0 … 60°C scale 0 … 6, heating, red LED, 8 (NTC 2 K) A


incl. sensor HF-8 / 4-K2 (4 m),
sensor also applicable with HTRRB-
011.010, ETR 77.804, FETR and FDTR-U
ITR 79.805 D 4780557 + 35 … + 95°C heating, red LED, 8 (NTC 2 K) A
incl. sensor HF-8 / 4-KS (4 m)

Catalogue 2007 | Page 79


Compact thermostat for installation in switch cabinets (on DIN rail) ITR 79
Electronic thermo controller with remote sensor
ITR 79.4… /.5… /.8… ITR 79.4… /.5… /.8…

ITR 79.6 ITR 79.6

ITR 79.503 ITR 79.503

Catalogue 2007 | Page 80


Universal thermostat ETR 77
Electronic controller with remote sensor
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 250 V ~, 50 / 60 Hz Due to different sensor designs universally
Switching capacity: 24 – 250 V ~, applicable for different tasks in the heating-,
10 (3) A – heating contact, ventilating-, air conditioning and refrigerating
5 (1) A – cooling contact technology field. Also suited for applications
in the machine and apparatus engineering
Contact: changeover contact
sphere. A red LED indicates the heating
Switching difference: adjustable (see table) condition.
Ambient temperature: – 20 … + 50°C
Indication: red LED (heating) Sensors are not included in the scope of
the delivery (except ETR 77.804-5). (As for
Degree of protection: IP 65 (internal setting)
choice of sensors available, see as of page
IP 54 (External setting)
99).
Protection class: II
Mounting / installation: wall mounting, independent of Application of sensor types according to
position sensor no. indicated (i.e. all no. 51 sensor
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016, types can be used, e.g. HF-51, RF-51 or
upper part RAL 7035) GFL-51, etc.).

Avoid parallel laying of sensor line and mains


supply cables or protect it by shielding.

Type Item No. Control range Equipment Switching difference Sensor PG

ETR 77.008-5 D 4770014 – 50 … + 50°C internal setting 0.5 … 5 K 51 (PTC 1 K) A

ETR 77.108-5 D 4770040 – 50 … + 50°C external setting 0.5 … 5 K 51 (PTC 1 K) A

ETR 77.009-5 D 4770026 0 … 100°C internal setting 0.5 … 5 K 51 (PTC 1 K) A

Industrial Technology
ETR 77.109-5 D 4770053 0 … 100°C external setting 0.5 … 5 K 51 (PTC 1 K) A

ETR 77.109-15 D 4770089 0 … 100°C external setting 5 … 15 K 51 (PTC 1 K) A

For remote sensor triggered control of floor heating systems PG

ETR 77.804-5 D4770956 0 … 60°C scale 0 … 6, internal setting incl. sensor HF-8 / 4-K 2 (4 m), A
Heating: 16 (4) A (NTC 2 K), also applicable for use with HTRRB-011.010, ITR 79.804,
Cooling: 8 (2) A FETR and FDTR-U

ETR 77 ETR 77

Catalogue 2007 | Page 81


Universal thermostat ETR 74
Electronic controller with remote sensor and digital indication, one-/two-stage type
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 250 V ~ (±10 %), 50 / 60 Hz For control and/or supervision of the tempe-
Switching capacity: 10 (3) A 24–250 V ~ ratures of gasiform or liquid media types with
digital actual value indication. Suited for sur-
Contact: 1 or 2 changeover contacts,
face installation in humid rooms or as remote
plug–in bridge “heating / cooling”
control in industry and agriculture.
Temperature range: 0 … 50°C
Digital display: 3 digit type for indication of Sensors are not included in the scope of
actual temperature the delivery. (As for choice of sensors availa-
LED: “heating operates”(at stage 1 ble, see as of page 99).
and 2)
Application of sensor types according to sen-
Switching difference: adjustable 0.2 … 5 K
sor no. indicated (i.e. all no. 57 sensor types
Ambient temperature: 0 … 45°C can be used, e.g. HF-57 or RF-57, etc.).
Degree of protection: IP 54
Protection class: II acc. to VDE 0700 Avoid parallel laying of sensor line and mains
supply cables or protect it by shielding.
Mounting / installation: wall mounting, independent of
position
Colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010

Type Item No. Control range Equipment Switching difference Sensor PG

ETR 74.1 G 8000272 0 … 50°C internal setting 0.2 K … 5 K 57 (PTC 2 K) J


one-stage outlet adjustable
ETR 74.2 G 8000273 0 … 50°C internal setting 0.2 … 5 K within the stage, 57 (PTC 2 K) J
two-stage outlet 1 … 5 K, adjustable
between the stages

ETR 74 ETR 74.1 ETR 74.2

Catalogue 2007 | Page 82


Electronic two-stage controller JBT-2
with remote sensor
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 250 V ~, 50 / 60 Hz Two stages for heating or cooling. If wiring
Switching capacity: 10 (3) A, 24–250 V ~ the relay contacts accordingly, “heating and
cooling” with neutral zone can be realised too.
Switching difference: adjustable
Desired function can be chosen by means of
0.2 … 1.5 K within the stage limit,
plug-in bridges.
0.2 … 6 K, between the stages
Contact: 2 relays as potential-free change- Sensors are not included in the scope of
over contacts the delivery. (For choice of sensors available,
Sensor: NTC resistor see as of page 99).
Ambient temperature: 0 … + 55°C
Application of sensor types according to
Degree of protection: IP 65, CP types (without housing)
sensor no. indicated (i.e. all H F, RF or LF
= IP 00
types can be used with this number, e.g.
Protection class: II, only with housing RF-3 or LF-23, etc.).
Mounting / installation: wall mounting or installation in
a switch cabinet Avoid parallel laying of sensor line and mains
Housing colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016, supply cables or protect it by shielding.
upper part RAL 7035)

Type Item No. Control range Equipment Sensor PG

JBT-21 A D 4760025 - 15 … 25°C 0 / 20 (NTC 2 K 25) E


JBT-21 A CP D 4760468 - 15 … 25°C without housing incl. 1 m remote 0 / 20 (NTC 2 K 25) E
potentiometer and DIN rail
JBT-22 A D 4760037 10 … 50°C 3 / 23 (NTC 8 K) E
JBT-22 A CP D 4760456 10 … 50°C without housing incl. 1 m remote 3 / 23 (NTC 8 K) E
potentiometer and DIN rail

Industrial Technology
JBT-23 A D 4760254 35 … 95°C 5 / 25 (NTC 50 K) E

JBT-21 A CP JBT-2.A

JBT-2.A

Catalogue 2007 | Page 8


4- / 6- and 8-stage controller JBT-4 / -6 / -8
Electronic controllers with remote sensor
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 250 V ~, 50 / 60 Hz JBT-4: Includes 4 stages “heating or cooling”.
Switching capacity: 10 (3) A, 24–250 V ~ If wiring the relay contacts accordingly,
“heating and cooling” with neutral zone can be
Switching difference: JBT-4: adjustable
realised too. Desired function can be chosen
0.25 … 2 K within the stage limits,
by means of plug-in bridges.
0.5 … 6 K, between the stages
JBT-6 / -8: adjustable
JBT-6 / -8: Includes 6 or 8 stages “heating
0.5 … 1.5 K within the stage limits,
or cooling”. Desired function selectable by
0.5 … 3 K, between the stages
means of a switch. LED indicator for mode
Contact: JBT-4: 4 relay as potential-free chan- indication.
geover contacts
JBT-6 / -8: 6 or 8 relay as potential- Sensors are not included in the scope of
free changeover contacts the delivery. (As for choice of available sen-
Sensor: NTC resistor sors see as of page 99).
Ambient temperature: 0 … + 55°C
Application of sensor types according to
Degree of protection: JBT-4: IP 65,
sensor no. indicated (i.e. all HF, RF or LF types
C / P-types
can be used with this number, e.g. HF-3 or
(without housing) = IP 00
LF-23, etc.).
JBT-6 / -8: IP 00
Protection class: II, only with housing Avoid parallel laying of sensor line and mains
Mounting / installation: JBT-4: wall mounting or installation in supply cables or protect it by shielding.
a switch cabinet
JBT-6 / -8: installation in a switch
cabinet
Housing colour: JBT-4: grey (bottom part RAL 7016,
upper part transparent)

Type Item No. Control range Equipment Sensor PG

JBT-420 B D 4760494 – 10 … + 50°C 3 / 23 (NTC 8 K) E


JBT-420 BC D 4760544 – 10 … + 50°C without housing 3 / 23 (NTC 8 K) E
JBT-420 BP D 4760520 – 10 … + 50°C without housing, incl. 1 m remote 3 / 23 (NTC 8 K) E
potentiometer and DIN rail
JBT-420 BPS D 4760532 – 10 … + 50°C like 420 BP, but with adjustable starting 3 / 23 (NTC 8 K) E
delay (2–200 s)
JBT-420 BS D 4760470 – 10 … + 50°C adjustable starting delay 2 – 200 s 3 / 23 (NTC 8 K) E
JBT-420 BCS D 4760557 – 10 … + 50°C without housing, but with adjustable 3 / 23 (NTC 8 K) E
starting delay (2 – 200 s)
JBT-61 AS D 4760616 – 15 … + 30°C without housing, but with adjustable 0 / 20 (NTC 2 K 25) E
starting delay (2 – 200 s)
JBT-81 AS D 4760280 – 15 … + 30°C without housing, but with adjustable 0 / 20 (NTC 2 K 25) E
starting delay (2 – 200 s)

JBT-420 BC JBT-61 AS

Catalogue 2007 | Page 8


4-stage controller JBT-4 and 6- and 8-stage controller JBT-4 / -6 / -8
Electronic controller with remote sensor
JBT-4 .. B JBT-4 .. B

JBT-61 AS / JBT-81 AS JBT-61 AS

Industrial Technology
JBT-81 AS

Catalogue 2007 | Page 85


Digital temperature indicator JDI-0 / -08,
DIN built-in housing
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz Can be used as thermometer if applied in
Sensor: PTC resistor combination with a remote sensor.
Ambient temperature: – 20 … + 50°C
Sensors are not included in the scope of
Degree of protection: IP 20 (front) the delivery. (For choice of sensors available,
Protection class: II see as of page 99).

Application of sensor types according to sen-


sor no. indicated (i.e. all no. 51 sensors can be
applied, e.g. HF-51 or LF-51, etc.).

Avoid parallel laying of sensor line and mains


supply cables or protect it by shielding.

Type Item No. Indication range Equipment Measuring points Sensor PG

JDI-0 D 4780306 – 40 … + 120°C 3-digit indication without decimal 1 51 (PTC 1 K) F


JDI-08 D 4780395 – 40 … + 120°C 3-digit indication without decimal, 8 51 (PTC 1 K) F
max. 8 measuring points can be
inquired by means of a rotary switch

JDI-0 JDI-0

JDI-08 JDI-08

Catalogue 2007 | Page 86


Digital thermostat ITR 71 / digital thermostat JDI-1 / -10
Temperature adjustment via “turning knob” or “potentiometer”,
DIN built-in housing
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 250 V ~, 50 / 60 Hz For control or supervision of temperatures
existing in fluid or gasiform media.
Switching capacity: 10 (3) A, 24 – 250 V ~
Contact: 1 relay as potential-free Sensors are not included in the scope
change over contact of the delivery. (As for choice of sensors
available, see as of page 99).
Ambient temperature: – 20 … + 50°C
Degree of protection: IP 20 (front) Application of sensor types according to
sensor no. indicated (i.e. all no. 51 sensors
Protection class: II can be applied, e.g. HF-51 or LF-51, etc.).
Mounting / installation: front panel installation Avoid parallel laying of sensor line and
mains supply cables.

Type Item No. Control range Switching difference Indication Sensor PG

ITR 71.050 D 4710018 – 40 … + 50°C approx. 0.5 … 5 K, adjustable 3-digit without decimal 51 (PTC 1 K) F
ITR 71.100 D 4710006 0 … 100°C approx. 0.5 … 5 K, adjustable 3-digit without decimal 51 (PTC 1 K) F
ITR 71.125 D 4710020 40 … 125°C approx. 0.5 … 5 K, adjustable 3-digit without decimal 51 (PTC 1 K) F

Type Item No. Control range Switching difference Indication Sensor PG

JDI-1 D 4780318 – 40 … + 120°C approx. 0.5 … 5 K, adjustable 3-digit without decimal 51 (PTC 1 K) F
JDI-10 D 4780539 – 40.0 … + 120.0°C approx. 0.5 … 5 K, adjustable 4-digit with decimal 51 (PTC 1 K) F

Industrial Technology
JDI-1 ITR-71

JDI-1 / -10 ITR 71 … +JDI-1 / -10

Catalogue 2007 | Page 87


Microprocessor controller JDI-22 / JDU-210 NEW
For PT-100 / PT-1000 sensors and measuring transducer
DIN built-in housing
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 230 V ~. 50 / 60 Hz 2 / 3-point controller for control and/or super-
Switching capacity: changeover contact: vision of temperatures existing in liquid or
10 (2) A, 24 … 250 V ~ gasiform media with decimal display of set/
make contact: actual value for front panel installation.
5 (1) A, 24 … 250 V ~
Suited for use as digital remote controller in
Contact: 1 relay as potential-free changeover
industry and agriculture and in the machine
contact, 1 relay as potential-free
building and apparatus engineering sphere.
make contact
The controllers are equipped with a serial
Sensor or standard see table below interface. Cross-linking and data acquisition
signal inputs: is possible via PC. The connection to an RS
Resolution: 0.1°C 232 interface is possible only when using an
(PT-100, -50 … + 200°C) appropriate interface connector. Especially
1.0°C our standard signal measuring transducers
(PT-100 / -1000, -200 … + 850°C) are qualified for use with the controller model
Accuracy: PT-100 / -1000: JDU-210. In this case, the measuring trans-
< 0.3 % FS ± 1 digit ducer itself will determine the corresponding
Standard signal: physical value.
< 0.2 % FS ± 1 digit
always at nominal temperature Sensors and measuring transducers are
(=25°C) not included in the scope of the delivery.
(As for choice of sensors or measuring trans-
Measuring rate: JDI-22: approx. 4 measurements / s
ducers available, see as of page 99).
JDU-210: approx. 4 measurements /
s with PT …, approx. 100 measure-
Avoid parallel laying of sensor line and mains
ments / s at normal signal
supply cables or protect it by shielding.
Supply of measuring 24 V = ± 5 % / 20 mA, galvanically
transducer (JDU-210): isolated Relay terminal allocation:
Ambient conditions: – 20… + 50°C, 0… 80 % r.h. (non Relay 1: Terminal 3 – input
condensing) Terminal 4 – make contact
Degree of protection: IP 54 (front) Relay 2: Terminal 5 – input
Terminal 6 – make contact
Protection class: II (front)
Terminal 7 – break contact
Terminals: terminal screws / plug-in terminals
(max. 1.5 mm2) Replaces the out-dated model variants
Mounting / installation: front panel installation JDI-21 (JDI-22) and JDI-210 / JDR 10 /
JDR-210 (JDU-210)!

Type Item No. Control range Control function Interface Sensor PG

JDI-22 G 800039800 – 50,0 … + 200,0°C 2 / 3-point controller serial PT 100 2 / 3-conductor) J


JDU-210 G 800039900 – 200,0 … + 850,0°C 2 / 3-point controller serial PT 100 (3-conductor) J
– 1999 … + 9999, ± 1 digit 2 point controller with alarm PT 1000 (2-conductor)
0 … 20 mA, 4… 20 mA,
0 … 1 V, 0 … 10 V

JDI-22 JDU-210

JDI-22 JDU-210

Catalogue 2007 | Page 88


3-point control input controller for use with motor-driven actuators
JDS-210
(quasicontinuous action) or PWM output with PI / PID behaviour
DIN built-in housing
Technical data Application
Measuring range: – 199,9 … + 650,0°C The JDS-210 is an universially applicable,
Power consumption: 5W micro-processor-controlled controller for
the joint operation with PT100 sensors. The
Operating voltage: 230 V ~, 50 / 60 Hz
device is mainly applied for the control of the
Switching capacity: 10 (3) A, 24 … 250 V ~ motor driven actuators of three-way mixing
Contact 1 relay as potential-free changeo- valves, straight way valves or air flaps. The
ver contact, device is equipped with a two wire interface
1 relay as potential-free make (RS-485). Cross-linking and data acquisition is
contact possible via PC.
Sensor: PT100 (4-, 3- and 2-conductor
connection technique) Sensors and measuring transducers are
not included in the scope of the delivery.
Resolution: 0.1°C
(As for choice of sensors or measuring trans-
Accuracy: < 0.3 % FS ±1 digit ducers available, see as of page 99).
(at nominal temperature = 25°C)
Measuring rate: 3 measurements / second Avoid parallel laying of sensor line and mains
Ambient conditions: 0 … 50°C, 0 … 80 %r.h. supply cables or protect it by shielding.
(non condensing)
Relay terminal allocation:
Degree of protection: IP 54 (front)
Relay 1: Terminal 6 – input
Protection class: II (front) Terminal 7 – make contact
Terminals: terminal screws / plug-in terminals Relay 2: Terminal 3 – break contact
(max. 1.5 m2) Terminal 4 – input
Terminal 5 – make contact

Control behaviour Explanation of terms

Industrial Technology
Function of the position transmitter: PWM (pulse width modulation):
Control behaviour: P, PD / OPENING – NEUTRAL – CLOSING. For The pulse / pause relation (pulse length t i – time of inactivity t p – pulse
the triggering / actuation of flaps, motor valves, etc. Relay 1 issues the duty ration V) varies within a certain predefined time (cycle duration T) in
command for ”OPENING” while relay 2 issues the one for ”CLOSING”. dependence on the set- / actual value deviation in such a way that a cer-
tain actuator (e.g. thermo-electric valve drive, electrical direct heating,
Function of the clocked PWM controller: etc.) can be triggered in a clocked manner.
Control behaviour: Clocked P-, PI-, PD-, PID controller. Relay 1 serves P behaviour: The control difference (set- / actual value deviation)
to adjust to the actually adjusted set value (control behaviour depending induces a proportional correcting variable.
on the actually adjusted control parameters), while relay 2 serves as an D behaviour: : The change rate of the control difference induces the
alarm relay min. / max. alarm. actual value of the related correcting variable.
I behaviour: The control difference induces the change rate of the
related correcting variable.

Type Item No. PG

JDS-210 G 8000377 J

JDS-210 JDS-210

Catalogue 2007 | Page 89


Air flow sensing relay JSL-1E
Mechanically operated
Technical data Application
Switching capacity: 15 (8) A, 24–250 V ~, Supervision of airflows in channels or
at 24 V ~ min.150mA conduits or of airflows in the supply or
Switching difference: > = 1 m/s exhaust air components or facilities of
fans or of electrical heating coils.
Contact: 1 microswitch as potential-
free changeover contact
The air flow sensing relay is, ex facto-
Degree of protection: IP 65 ry, adjusted to the minimum switching
Protection class: I points. Turning the internal screw in clock-
Ambient temperature: – 40 … + 80°C wise direction enables to increase the
swich-on or switch-off values. The device
Max. temperature of medium: 85°C
is provided for vertical installation, top
Lever: brass down into a horizontally running pipeline
Tag: V2A (1.4301) or conduit.
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016,
upper part RAL 7035)

Type Item No. Min. Min. switch-off Max. Max. PG


switch-on value value switch-on value switch-off value

JSL-1E JA 070100 2 m/s 1 m/s 9.2 m/s 8.0 m/s G

Accessories PG

JZ-08 spare tag, E 6150031, see pages 159 – 160 K


Option: screwed cable gland M 20 x 1.5 (standard: M 16 x 1.5) G

JSL-1E JSL-1E

Catalogue 2007 | Page 90


Air flow monitor JSL-20 / 21
Electronic controller
Technical data Application
Power supply: 250 V ~ (24 V ~ at JSL-20 / 24 V and JSL- For the flow-dependent supervision
21 / 24 V) of fans, regulating valves of humidifie-
Working range: 0.2 to 10 m/s rs and electric coil heating systems
(max. air velocity = 10 m/s) according to DIN 57100, part 420 or
for the combined application with
Switching capacity: 10 (3) A, 24–250 V ~,
DDC units.
min.150 mA at 24 V ~
Measuring principle: hot film anemometer The sensor cable can be extended up
Operating principle: The air flow acts on a sensor housed to 100 m length.
inside a sensor tube in a cooling manner.
The stronger the air flow, the higher the The sensor line must not be laid in
cooling effect on the sensor. A second parallel with mains supply cables.
sensing element seves to compensate the Recommended cable: 4 x 0.75 mm2,
effect of the air temperature. shielded.
Switching hysteresis: 1 … 10 %
Switch-on delay: 15 … 120 s
Fall delay time: 2 … 20 s
Contact: changeover contact (relay, potential-free)
Degree of protection: IP 65
Protection class: II
Ambient temperature: sensor: – 20 … + 100°C,
controller: 0 … 60°C
Fastening: independent of position
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016,
upper part RAL 7035)

Type Item No. Relay Integral sensor Equipment PG

Industrial Technology
JSL-20 G 8000004 1 no without locking J
JSL-20 / 24 V G 8000117 1 no without locking J
JSL-20 K G 8000204 1 yes without locking J
JSL-21* G 8000016 2 no with locking ** J
JSL-21 / 24 V* G 8000133 2 no with locking ** J
* without locking (on request)
** device to be disconnected and to be made voltage-free for resetting

JSL-20 K JSL-20 / -21 JSL-20

JSL-20 / -21, sensor JSL-21

Catalogue 2007 | Page 91


Differential pressure switches JDW-3 … 10 / JDL-109 … 117

Technical data Application


JDW-3 / -5 / -10 For the supervision of overpressure,
Switching capacity: 1.5 (0.4) A, 12–250 V ~ differential pressure or negative pres-
1 (0.2) A, 12–24V ~ / = sure levels in airflows or non-aggres-
sive, non-compbustible types of gas.
Contact: changeover contact (gold contact), Also applicable for the supervision of
terminal screws pressures in exhaust airflows, airflows
Degree of protection: IP 54 produced by fans or for use as flow
monitor for the protection of electrical
Protection class: II coil heating systems, the supervision
of filters or for air pressure deficiency
Ambient temperature: – 15 … + 80°C protection purposes or use as adap-
Pressure connection nozzle: 6.2 mm tive constraint control.

Colour: black JDW- …: Delivered without installati-


on bracket. Bracket can be fastened
directly by means of two screws.
Delivery also possible with installation
JDL-109 / 113, JDL-111, JDL-112 / 115-117 bracket JZ-10 in already attached
Switching capacity: 5 (1) A, 12–250 V ~ condition (optional).
1 (0.2) A, 12–24 V ~ / =
Contact: changeover contact (gold contact) JDL …: Delivered with installation
bracket JZ-10 in already attached
Degree of protection: IP 54 (JDL-109 / 113: IP 20) condition.
Protection class: II
Note: The gold layer on the contacts
Terminal screws: JDL-111, JDL-112 / 115 … 117 will, in the event the differential
pressure switches a voltage > 24 V
Cable lug connector: JDL-109 / 113 and a current > 0.1 A, burn off. Any
time thereafter, the device can only
Ambient temperature: – 15 … + 80°C be operated at exactly this or at
a higher level of power.
Pressure connection nozzle: 6.2 mm
Colour: black

Note: The hose set is not included in the scope of the delivery and
needs to be ordered seperately.

Pressure conversion table

Pa kPa bar mbar mWs


1 Pa = 1 0,001 0,00001 0,01 0,000101971
1 kPa = 1,000 1 0,01 10 0,101971
1 bar = 100.000 100 1 1,000 10,1971
1 mbar = 100 0,1 0,001 1 0,0101971
1 mWs = 9.806,65 9,80665 0,0980665 98.0665 1

Type Item No. Setting range Switching difference Max. pressure PG


dependent on setting
range

JDW-3 H 531002 20 … 330 Pa 8 … 20 Pa 5,000 Pa G


JDW-5 H 530996 30 … 500 Pa 10 … 25 Pa 5,000 Pa G
JDW-10 H 530997 400 … 1.600 Pa 30 … 60 Pa 5,000 Pa G

Type Item No. Setting ex factory Switching difference Max. pressure PG


or setting range dependent on setting
range

JDL-109 H 530959 exempt from silicone 20 Pa (ex factoy) 10 Pa 15,000 Pa G


JDL-111 H 5309098 exempt from silicone 20 … 300 Pa 10 … 15 Pa 15,000 Pa G
JDL-112 H 5309100 exempt from silicone 40 … 600 Pa 22 … 33 Pa 30,000 Pa G
JDL-113 H 530998 40 Pa (ex factoy) 15 Pa 5,000 Pa G

Catalogue 2007 | Page 92


Differential pressure switches JDW-3 … 10 / JDL-109 … 117

Type Item No. Setting ex factory or Switching difference max. pressure PG


setting range dependent on setting
range

JDL-115 H 5309136 exempt from silicone 100 … 1,000 Pa 20 … 40 Pa 30,000 Pa G


JDL-116 H 530960 exempt from silicone 250 … 5,000 Pa 60 … 150 Pa 30,000 Pa G
JDL-116 A H 530978 exempt from silicone 250 … 5,000 Pa 60 … 150 Pa 30,000 Pa G
JDL-117 A H 530991 exempt from silicone 3,000 … 15,000 Pa* 250 … 600 Pa 30,000 Pa G
* Indications on the adjusting knob in mbar
Order index A = with external setting

Accessories

Type Item No. PG

JZ-06 / 1 H 5309229 Connection set with 2 channel connecting pieces of plastic, angular (90°), K
2 extensions (90 mm), 4 self-tapping screws, 2 m hose (outside Ø 6 mm)
JZ-10 H 5309237 Installation bracket with screws for types JDL-109 / 113 and JDW-3 / -5 / -10 (Z shape) K

JDW-3 / -5 / -10 JDL-109 JDL-113

Industrial Technology
JDL-111 JDL-112 / 115 … -17 JDW- … / JDL- …

JZ-06/1 JZ-10

Catalogue 2007 | Page 9


Flow monitor JSF-1 E … 4 E
Mechanically operated – TÜV tested
Technical data Application
Switching capacity: 15 (8) A, 24–250 V ~, Flow supervision of liquid media that flow
min. 150 mA at 24 V ~ through 1⁄2˝ up to 8˝ tubes or pipes, such
Contact: 1 microswitch as potential-free as in oil, cooling or lubricant circuits. Can
changeover contact also be applied as protection against the
lack of water.
Accuracy: ± 15 % of adjusted set value
Degree of protection: IP 65 Installation: vertical into a horizontal
Protection class: I tube (also possible into vertically running
tubes or pipes – see operating instruc-
Ambient temperature: – 40 … + 85 °C tions).
Max. temperature of medium: 120 °C
Moderation distance needed: equivalent
Paddle: V4A to min. 5fold tube diameter in front of
Colour: grey (bottom part RAL 7016, and after the paddle.*
upper part RAL 7035)
The max. flow can be significantly higher
TÜV type tested, “Flow 100” compliant up to 6“ than the max. monitor setting value.

Component reference no.: TÜV S. 04-016 1 … -4 E


TÜV S. 04-017 1 RE, 2 RE

Type Item No. Pipe Max. operating Medium Equipment Carrier body PG
pressure

JSF-3 E JA 060500 1⁄ ˝
2 5 bar normal attached T-piece (grey cast iron) Brass G
JSF-4 E JA 060600 3⁄ ˝
4 5 bar normal attached T-piece (grey cast iron) Brass G
JSF-1 E JA 060100 1 ˝… 8 ˝ 8 bar normal Brass G
JSF-1 RE JA 060200 1 ˝… 8 ˝ 5 bar normal reduced switching values ** Brass G
JSF-2 E JA 060300 1 ˝… 8 ˝ 13 bar aggressive *** V4A G
JSF-2 RE JA 060400 1 ˝… 8 ˝ 5 bar aggressive *** reduced switching values ** V4A G

Accessories PG

JZ-09 spare paddle (4 pieces each) as of 1˝ to 8 ˝ (E6140170) see pages 159 - 160 K
Option: screwed cable gland M 20 x 1.5 (standard: M 16 x 1.5) G
* for 1 ˝ = paddle 1 In the event it was necessary to attain reduced flow values (marked in the table in the column
for 2 ˝ = paddle 1 and 2 under the header „Pipe“ with the additional character Z), the paddle 4 needs to be used as
for 3 ˝ up to 8 ˝ = paddle 1, 2 and 3 follows:
at 4 ˝ = paddle 1, 2, 3, 4 (paddle 4 to be shortened to 92 mm)
at 5 ˝ = paddle 1, 2, 3, 4 (paddle 4 to be shortened to 117 mm)
at 6 ˝ = paddle 1, 2, 3, 4 (paddle 4 to be shortened to 143 mm)
at 7 ˝and 8 ˝ = paddle 1, 2, 3, 4 (paddle 4 unshortened)
** Types for low throughput rates (see switching value table) “RE”
*** Aggressive types of media: all parts of the flow monitor in contact with the medium are made of V4A

JSF-.E / RE DN Pipe
Nominal thread
width Inch
6 1/ ˝
8
8 1/ ˝
4
10 3/ ˝
8
15 1/ ˝
2 JSF-.E / RE
20 3/ ˝
4
25 1˝
32 1 1/4 ˝
40 1 1/2 ˝
50 2˝
65 2 1/2 ˝
80 3˝
100 4˝
125 5˝
150 6˝

Catalogue 2007 | Page 9


Flow monitor JSF-1 E … 4 E
Mechanically operated – TÜV tested

Switching value table, specifications in m 3 / h for JSF-1 E / 2 E / 1 RE / 2 RE

Type Pipe diameter Min. setting Max. setting


(factory setting)
Off On Off On

E 1 ˝ 0.55 0.86 2.00 2.10


RE 1 ˝ 0.19 0.57 1.00 1.10
E 1 ¼ ˝ 0.82 1.30 2.80 3.00
RE 1 ¼ ˝ 0.24 0.90 1.40 1.60
E 1 ½ ˝ 1.10 1.70 4.00 4.20
RE 1 ½ ˝ 0.50 1.20 1.90 2.20
E 2 ˝ 2.10 3.20 7.30 7.80
RE 2 ˝ 0.90 2.30 3.60 4.10
E 2 ½ ˝ 2.80 4.30 9.80 10.50
RE 2 ½ ˝ 1.20 3.10 4.90 5.50
E 3 ˝ 4.00 6.10 13.80 14.70
RE 3 ˝ 2.10 4.90 7.40 8.20
E 4 ˝ 10.40 15.40 32.00 33.90
RE 4 ˝ 4.90 11.30 17.10 19.10
E 4 ˝ Z 7.00 10.50 21.70 23.10
RE 4 ˝ Z 3.30 7.70 11.60 13.00

Industrial Technology
E 5 ˝ 20.80 30.60 63.50 67.30
RE 5 ˝ 9.70 22.40 34.00 37.90
E 5 ˝ Z 10.70 15.80 33.30 34.70
RE 5 ˝ Z 5.00 11.50 17.50 19.60
E 6 ˝ 29.20 43.00 89.10 94.50
RE 6 ˝ 13.60 31.50 47.60 53.20
E 6 ˝ Z 13.10 19.30 39.90 42.40
RE 6 ˝ Z 6.10 14.10 21.40 23.90
E 8 ˝ 72.60 85.10 165.70 172.50
RE 8 ˝ 25.70 59.60 90.10 100.70
E 8 ˝ Z 38.60 46.50 90.80 94.20
RE 8 ˝ Z 21.70 36.50 55.30 61.80

Some values in the column under the header “Pipe diameter” have been marked with the character Z (= additional paddle). In any of these cases, the
long fourth paddle, which is included in the scope of the delivery, must be used in addition to the 3 factory mounted paddles.

Switching value table, specifications in l / h for JSF-3 E / -4 E


3E ½ 174 480 846 948
4E ¾ 138 408 768 858

The accuracy of the indicated values depends in particular on the actual tube or pipe diameter, on the actual shortening of the additional paddle and on
the depth at which the flow monitor is installed.

Catalogue 2007 | Page 95


Flow switch JSW
with appliance plug
Technical data Application
Switching capacity: 5 A, 24–250 V ~ Supervision of lower and medium quanti-
Contact: 1 microswitch as potential-free ties of non-aggressive liquids in tubes of
changeover contact lower diameters ranging from 3/8˝ to 1˝.
Switching point fidelity: ± 15 % of the end value
Installation: vertical in a horizontal tube.
Degree of protection: IP 65 Moderation distance needed: equivalent
Protection class: II to min. 5fold tube diameter in front of and
Max. temperature of me- 110 °C after the paddle.
dium:
max. pressure: 25 bar
Colour: black
Housing material: brass
Paddle: non-rusting (NIRO)
Brass cap nut, r. 3/4˝, with O-ring and connecting piece for soldering
into a standard copper T-piece with 1/2 ˝ tee included in the scope of
the delivery.

Type Item No. Tube DN max. Switch point, decreasing* Switch point, increasing ∆l / min PG

JSW-3 / 8 H 530943 3⁄ ˝
8 10 10 l / min. 3.5 … 5.0 l / min 4.0 … 5.5 l / min 0.5 G
JSW-1 / 2 H 530944 1⁄ ˝
2 15 20 l / min. 5.0 … 6.5 l / min 5.5 … 7.0 l / min 0.5 G
JSW-3 / 4 H 530945 ¾˝ 20 40 l / min. 7.0 … 9.5 l / min 9.0 … 11.0 l / min 2.0 G
JSW-1 H 530946 1˝ 25 60 l / min. 13.5 … 16.5 l / min 17.0 … 20.5 l / min 3.5 G

T-pieces (nickel-plated brass):


3⁄ ˝ H 530958 G
8

1⁄ ˝ H 530957 G
2

3⁄ ˝ H 530951 G
4

1˝ H 530953 G

* The above indicated switching values apply only if the flow monitor is installed into our T-piece! The use of copper T-pieces will increase the effective
switching values.

JSW JSW JSW

Catalogue 2007 | Page 96


Sensors

Sensors
Overview of sensors:
Temperature
Room temperature sensors (surface / flush installation) – passive Page 100 – Page 111

Outdoor temperature sensors – passive / active Page 112 – Page 115

Sleeve type sensors – sleeve type sensors with PVC cable / Page 116 – Page 119
air temperature sensors

Room pendulum temperature sensors / room radiation temperature Page 120 – Page 121
sensors

Mean temperature sensors – passive / active Page 122 – Page 123

Built-in duct sensors – passive / active Page 124 – Page 129

Industrial built-in duct sensors (design B) – passive / active Page 130 – Page 134

Surface temperature sensors Page 135

Clip-on temperature sensors – passive / active Page 136 – Page 137

Airflow / pressure / differential pressure


Differential pressure measuring transducers (air) Page 138 – Page 139

Pressure measuring transducers (liquids / gases) Page 140 – Page 141

Airflow measuring transducers Page 142

Motion / brightness / air quality


Motion sensors (indoor / outdoor) Page 143
Sensors

Air quality sensors (room / duct) Page 144 – Page 145

Brightness sensors (indoor / outdoor) Page 146

Humidity
Temperature and humidity measuring transducers Page 147 – Page 150
(room / duct and outdoor versions)

Sensor characteristics (see technical annex) Page 162 – Page 163

Catalogue 2007 | Page 99


Room temperature sensor PTF/RF – surface installation
With or without control elements
Technical data Application
Sensors: see tables Measuring of temperatures, set value
other sensors available on request adjustment, presence reporting, control
unit with control elements (with / without
Tolerance classes: PT100/PT1000 DIN EN 60751 B sensor), for use in living spaces or
Ni 1000 DIN EN 43760 B business rooms.
Ambient temperature: –10…+50ºC
Please pay regard to the EMC directives.
Housing: plastic Avoid parallel laying of sensor line and
mains supply cables or use shielded
Colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 lines.
Control elements: black or white
The installation and wiring of the lower
LED: standard: green and red, on section can be carried out seperately on
request also available in yellow the surface or on a 60 mm switch box
Protection class: III using box mounting screws. The elec-
trical connection is realised by means
Degree of protection: IP 30 of terminal screws. Range suppression
Potentiometer: 5 k Ω (standard), other potentio- possible (facility located anderneath of
meters available on request the adjusting knob).

LED connection: max. 24 V~/=


Connecting cable: 0.14 up to 1.5 mm2,
NTC up to 50 m
PTC up to100 m
Connection: to safety extra low voltage only,
max. 30 V~/42 V=
Control elements: key-button, 35 mA
rocker switch, 2 or 3 positions,
1 A, middle position unconnected
rotary switch, 4 positions, 130 mA,
neutral position unconnected
Sensor characteristics: Page 162 – 163

Accessory PG

As for adapter plate PAP01-14, see pages 159 – 160 K

Optional

PT-100 class A S

PT-100 1⁄3 DIN S

PT-100 1⁄10 DIN S

PT-1000 1⁄3 DIN S

PTF, dimensioned drawing

Catalogue 2007 | Page 100


Room temperature sensor PTF/RF - surface installation
For the detection of temperatures in dry rooms

Technical data
LED:
green, max. 24 V~/=
Sensing device:
max. 35 mA/24 V~/=
Weight:
80 g

For further details,


please see page 100

Sensor Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG

PT 100 PTFP 100-0000 S PTFP 100-0003 S PTFP 100-0004 S


SN 010 000 SN 010 010 SN 010 020
PT 1000 PTFP 1000-0000 S PTFP 1000-0003 S PTFP 1000-0004 S
SN 010 001 SN 010011 SN 010 021
NI 1000 PTFN 1000-0000 S PTFN 1000-0003 S PTFN 1000-0004 S
SN 010 002 SN 010 012 SN 010 022
NI 1000 PTFN 1000 S PTFN 1000 S PTFN 1000 S
TK 5000 TK 5000-0000 TK 5000 0003 TK 5000-0004
SN 010 003 SN 010013 SN 010023
NTC 1 K 8 PTFC 18-0000 S PTFC 18-0003 S PTFC 18-0004 S
SN 010 169 SN 010 171 SN 010 173
NTC 3 K PTFC 03-0000 S PTFC 03-0003 S PTFC 03-0004 S
SN 010 004 SN 010014 SN 010 024
NTC 10 K PTFC 10-0000 S PTFC 10-0003 S PTFC 10-0004 S
SN 010 005 SN 010 015 SN 010 025
NTC 10 K Prekon PTFC 10PRE-0000 S PTFC 10 PRE-0003 S PTFC 10 PRE-0004 S
SN 010 006 SN 010 016 SN 010 026
NTC 20 K PTFC 20-0000 S PTFC 20-0003 S PTFC 20-0004 S
SN 010 153 SN 010 154 SN 010 155
NTC 30 K PTFC 30-0000 S PTFC 30-0003 S PTFC 30-0004 S
SN 010 170 SN 010 172 SN 010 174
NTC 50 K PTFC 50-0000 S PTFC 50-0003 S PTFC 50-0004 S
SN 010 007 SN 010 017 SN 010 027
KTY 11 / 6 PTFY 11 / 6-0000 S PTFY 11 / 6-0003 S PTFY 11 / 6-0004 S
SN 010 008 SN 010 018 SN 010 028
LM 235 Z PTFLM-0000 S PTFLM 0003 S PTFLM-0004 S
SN 010 009 SN 010 019 SN 010 029
NTC 2K25 RF-0 S
D 4771238
NTC 47 K RF -2 S
D 4771244
NTC 8 K RF -3 S
D 4771239
Sensors

NTC 10 K RF -4 S
D 4771245
NTC 2 K RF -8 S
D 4771228
PTC 1 K RF -51 S
D 4771252
PTC 2 K RF -57 S
D 4771290
NTC 8 K and PTC 1 K RF -43 S
D 4771285

Catalogue 2007 | Page 101


Room temperature sensor PTF - surface installation
For the detection of temperatures in dry rooms

Technical data
LED:
green, max. 24 V~/=
Potentiometer:
Standard: 5KΩ
Rocker switch:
1 A/30 V~/42 V=
Weight:
80 g

For further details,


please see page 100

Sensor Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG

PT 100 PTFP 100-0009 S PTFP 100-P0500 S PTFP 100-P0501 S


SN 010 143 SN 010 030 SN 010 040
PT 1000 PTFP 1000-0009 S PTFP 1000-P0500 S PTFP 1000-P0501 S
SN 010 144 SN 010 031 SN 010 041
NI 1000 PTFN 1000-0009 S PTFN 1000-P0500 S PTFN 1000-P0501 S
SN 010 145 SN 010 032 SN 010 042
NI 1000 PTFN 1000 S PTFN 1000 S PTFN 1000 S
TK 5000 TK 5000-0009 TK 5000-P0500 TK 5000-P0501
SN 010 146 SN 010 033 SN 010 043
NTC 1 K 8 PTFC 18-0009 S PTFC 18-P0500 S PTFC 18-P0501 S
SN 010 175 SN 010 177 SN 010 179
NTC 3 K PTFC 03-0009 S PTFC 03-P0500 S PTFC 03-P0501 S
SN 010 147 SN 010 034 SN 010 044
NTC 10 K PTFC 10-0009 S PTFC 10-P0500 S PTFC 10-P0501 S
SN 010 148 SN 010 035 SN 010 045
NTC 10 K Prekon PTFC 10PRE-0009 S PTFC 10 PRE-P0500 S PTFC 10 PRE-P0501 S
SN 010 149 SN 010 036 SN 010 046
NTC 20 K PTFC 20-0009 S PTFC 20-P0500 S PTFC 20-P0501 S
SN 010 156 SN 010 157 SN 010 158
NTC 30 K PTFC 30-0009 S PTFC 30-P0500 S PTFC 30-P0501 S
SN 010 176 SN 010 178 SN 010 180
NTC 50 K PTFC 50-0009 S PTFC 50-P0500 S PTFC 50-P0501 S
SN 010 150 SN 010 037 SN 010 047
KTY 11 / 6 PTFY 11 / 6-0009 S PTFY 11 / 6-P0500 S PTFY 11 / 6-P0501 S
SN 010 151 SN 010 038 SN 010 048
LM 235 Z PTFLM-0009 S PTFLM P0500 S PTFLM-P0501 S
SN 010 152 SN 010 039 SN 010 049

Catalogue 2007 | Page 102


Room temperature sensor PTF – surface installation
For the detection of temperatures in dry rooms

Technical data
LED:
green, max. 24 V~/=
Potentiometer:
Standard: 5 KΩ
Rotary switch:
max. 130 mA/24 V~/=
Key-button:
max. 35 mA/24 V~/=
Weight:
80 g

For further details,


please see page 100

Sensor Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG

PT 100 PTFP 100-P0503 S PTFP 100-P0504 S PTFP 100-P0527 S


SN 010 050 SN 010 060 SN 010 070
PT 1000 PTFP 1000-P0503 S PTFP 1000-P0504 S PTFP 1000-P0527 S
SN 010 051 SN 010 061 SN 010 071
NI 1000 PTFN 1000-P0503 PTFN 1000-P0504 S PTFN 1000-P0527 S
SN 010 052 SN 010 062 SN 010 072
NI 1000 PTFN 1000 S PTFN 1000 S PTFN 1000 S
TK 5000 TK 5000-P0503 TK 5000-P0504 TK 5000-P0527
SN 010 053 SN 010 063 SN 010 073
NTC 1 K 8 PTFC 18-P0503 S PTFC 18-P0504 S PTFC 18-P0527 S
SN 010 181 SN 010 183 SN 010 185
NTC 3 K PTFC 03-P0503 S PTFC 03-P0504 S PTFC 03-P0527 S
SN 010 054 SN 010 064 SN 010 074
NTC 10 K PTFC 10-P0503 S PTFC 10-P0504 S PTFC 10-P0527 S
SN 010 055 SN 010 065 SN 010 075
NTC 10 K Prekon PTFC 10PRE-P0503 S PTFC 10 PRE-P0504 S PTFC 10 PRE-P0527 S
SN 010 056 SN 010 066 SN 010 076
NTC 20 K PTFC 20-P0503 S PTFC 20-P0504 S PTFC 20-P0527 S
SN 010 159 SN 010 160 SN 010 161
NTC 30 K PTFC 30-P0503 S PTFC 30-P0504 S PTFC 30-P0527 S
SN 010 182 SN 010 184 SN 010 186
NTC 50 K PTFC 50-P0503 S PTFC 50-P0504 S PTFC 50-P0527 S
SN 010 057 SN 010 067 SN 010 077
KTY 11 / 6 PTFY 11 / 6-P0503 S PTFY 11 / 6-P0504 S PTFY 11 / 6-P0527 S
SN 010 058 SN 010 068 SN 010 078
LM 235 Z PTFLM-P0503 S PTFLM P0504 S PTFLM-P0527 S
SN 010 059 SN 010 069 SN 010 0079 Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 10


Room temperature sensor PTF – surface installation
For the detection of temperatures in dry rooms

Technical data
LED:
green, max. 24 V~/=
Potentiometer:
Standard 5 KΩ
Rotary switch:
max. 130 mA/24 V~/=
Rocker switch:
1 A/30 V~/42 V=
Weight:
80 g

For further details,


see page 100

Sensor Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG

PT 100 PTFP 100-0028 S PTFP 100-P0528 S PTFP 100-P0537 S


SN 010 080 SN 010 090 SN 010 100
PT 1000 PTFP 1000-0028 S PTFP 1000-P0528 S PTFP 1000-P0537 S
SN 010 081 SN 010 091 SN 010 101
NI 1000 PTFN 1000-0028 S PTFN 1000-P0528 S PTFN 1000-P0537 S
SN 010 082 SN 010 092 SN 010 102
NI 1000 PTFN 1000 S PTFN 1000 S PTFN 1000 S
TK 5000 TK 5000-0028 TK 5000-P0528 TK 5000-P0537
SN 010 083 SN 010 093 SN 010 103
NTC 1 K 8 PTFC 18-0028 S PTFC 18-P0528 S PTFC 18-P0537 S
SN 010 187 SN 010 189 SN 010 191
NTC 3 K PTFC 03-0028 S PTFC 03-P0528 S PTFC 03-P0537 S
SN 010 084 SN 010 094 SN 010 104
NTC 10 K PTFC 10-0028 S PTFC 10-P0528 S PTFC 10-P0537 S
SN 010 085 SN 010 095 SN 010 105
NTC 10 K Prekon PTFC 10PRE-0028 S PTFC 10 PRE-P0528 S PTFC 10 PRE-P0537 S
SN 010 086 SN 010 096 SN 010 106
NTC 20 K PTFC 20-0028 S PTFC 20-P0528 S PTFC 20-P0537 S
SN 010 162 SN 010 163 SN 010 164
NTC 30 K PTFC 30-0028 S PTFC 30-P0528 S PTFC 30-P0537 S
SN 010 188 SN 010 190 SN 010 192
NTC 50 K PTFC 50-0028 S PTFC 50-P0528 S PTFC 50-P0537 S
SN 010 087 SN 010 097 SN 010 107
KTY 11 / 6 PTFY 11 / 6-0028 S PTFY 11 / 6-P0528 S PTFY 11 / 6-P0537 S
SN 010 088 SN 010 098 SN 010 108
LM 235 Z PTFLM-0028 S PTFLM P0528 S PTFLM-P0537 S
SN 010 089 SN 010 099 SN 010 109

Catalogue 2007 | Page 10


Room temperature sensor PTF – surface installation
For the detection of temperatures in dry rooms

Technical data
LED:
green and red, max. 24 V~/=
Potentiometer:
standard 5 KΩ
Rotary switch:
max. 130 mA/24 V~/=
Rocker switch:
1 A/30 V~/42 V=
Key-button:
max. 35 mA/24 V~/=
Weight:
80 g

For further details,


see page 100

Sensor Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG

PT 100 PTFP 100-P0508 S PTFP 100-P0532 S PTFP 100-P0520 S


SN 010 110 SN 010 120 SN 010 130
PT 1000 PTFP 1000-P0508 S PTFP 1000-P0532 S PTFP 1000-P0520 S
SN 010 111 SN 010 121 SN 010 131
NI 1000 PTFN 1000-P0508 S PTFN 1000-P0532 S PTFN 1000-P0520 S
SN 010 112 SN 010 122 SN 010 132
NI 1000 PTFN 1000 S PTFN 1000 S PTFN 1000 S
TK 5000 TK 5000-P0508 TK 5000-P0532 TK 5000-P0520
SN 010 113 SN 010 123 SN 010 133
NTC 1 K 8 PTFC 18-P0508 S PTFC 18-P0532 S PTFC 18-P0520 S
SN 010 193 SN 010 195 SN 010 197
NTC 3 K PTFC 03-P0508 S PTFC 03-P0532 S PTFC 03-P0520 S
SN 010 114 SN 010 124 SN 010 134
NTC 10 K PTFC 10-P0508 S PTFC 10-P0532 S PTFC 10-P0520 S
SN 010 115 SN 010 125 SN 010 135
NTC 10 K Prekon PTFC 10PRE-P0508 S PTFC 10 PRE- S PTFC 10 PRE-P0520 S
SN 010 116 P0532 SN 010 136
SN 010 126
NTC 20 K PTFC 20-P0508 S PTFC 20-P0532 S PTFC 20-P0520 S
SN 010 165 SN 010 166 SN 010 167
NTC 30 K PTFC 30-P0508 S PTFC 30-P0532 S PTFC 30-P0520 S
SN 010 194 SN 010 196 SN 010 198
NTC 50 K PTFC 50-P0508 S PTFC 50-P0532 S PTFC 50-P0520 S
SN 010 117 SN 010 127 SN 010 137
KTY 11 / 6 PTFY 11 / 6-P0508 S PTFY 11 / 6-P0532 S PTFY 11 / 6-P0520 S
SN 010 118 SN 010 128 SN 010 138
LM 235 Z PTFLM-P0508 S PTFLM P0532 S PTFLM-P0520 S
SN 010 119 SN 010 129 SN 010 139
Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 105


Room temperature sensor FUF – flush installation
with or without control elements
Technical data Application
Sensors: see tables, other sensors available Measuring of temperatures, set value
on request adjustment, presence reporting,
Tolerance classes: PT100/PT1000 DIN EN 60751 B control unit with control elements,
NI1000 DIN EN 43760 B for flush installation in an UP box in
living spaces and business rooms.
Ambient temperature: –10…+50ºC
Can also be adapted to almost all
Storage temperature: –20…+70ºC currently available pure white switch
Housing: plastic frame systems when using DIN
Colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 49075 compliant intermediate frames.
(Frames are not included in the scope
LED: standard: green and red
of the delivery).
yellow also available on request
Protection class: III For examples of the integration
Degree of protection: IP 30 into different switch lines, see
Potentiometer: 5 KΩ (standard), page 14.
other values possible on request
LED connection: max. 24 V~/=
Connecting cable: 0.14 bis 1.5 mm2, NTC bis 50 m
PTC bis 100 m
Control elements: Rotary switch 4 positions, 130 mA,
neutral position unconnected,
Key-button 35 mA
Rocker switch 2 or 3 positions,
1 A, middle position unconnected
Fastening: in Ø 55 mm UP box
Sensor characteristics: Page 162 – 163

The electrical connection is realised by means of terminal screws.


Admitted for connection to safety extra low voltage (SELV) only
(max. 30 V~/42 V=). Range suppression possible (facility located
anderneath of the adjusting knob).
Please pay regard to the EMC directives. Avoid parallel laying of sensor
line and mains supply cables or use shielded sensor lines.

Accessory Item No. Colour PG

Frame UN 990 002 pure white (similar to RAL 9010), neutral S

Optional

PT-100 class A S

PT-100 1⁄3 DIN S

PT-100 1⁄10 DIN S

PT-1000 1⁄3 DIN S

Catalogue 2007 | Page 106


Room temperature sensor FUF – flush installation
with or without control elements

Technical data
LED:
green, max. 24 V~/=
Key-button:
max. 35mA, 24 V~/=
Weight:
80 g

For further details,


see page 106

Sensor Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG

PT 100 FUFP 100-0000 S FUFP 100-0001 S FUFP 100-0003 S


SN 090 000 SN 090 040 SN 090 010
PT 1000 FUFP 1000-0000 S FUFP 1000-0001 S FUFP 1000-0003 S
SN 090 001 SN 090 041 SN 090 011
NI 1000 FUFN 1000-0000 S FUFN 1000-0001 S FUFN 1000-0003 S
SN 090 002 SN 090 042 SN 090 012
NI 1000 FUFN 1000 S FUFN 1000 S FUFN 1000 S
TK 5000 TK 5000-0000 TK 5000-0001 TK 5000-0003
SN 090 003 SN 090 043 SN 090 013
NTC 1 K 8 FUFC 18-0000 S FUFC 18-0001 S FUFC 18-0003 S
SN 090 165 SN 090 167 SN 090 169
NTC 3 K FUFC 03-0000 S FUFC 03-0001 S FUFC 03-0003 S
SN 090 004 SN 090 044 SN 090 014
NTC 10 K FUFC 10-0000 S FUFC 10-0001 S FUFC 10-0003 S
SN 090 005 SN 090 045 SN 090 015
NTC 10 K Prekon FUFC 10 PRE-0000 S FUFC 10 PRE-0001 S FUFC 10 PRE-0003 S
SN 090 006 SN 090 046 SN 090 016
NTC 20 K FUFC 20-0000 S FUFC 20-0001 S FUFC 20-0003 S
SN 090 007 SN 090 047 SN 090 017
NTC 30 K FUFC 30-0000 S FUFC 30-0001 S FUFC 30-0003 S
SN 090 166 SN 090 168 SN 090 170
NTC 50 K FUFC 50-0000 S FUFC 50-0001 S FUFC 50-0003 S
SN 090 008 SN 090 048 SN 090 018
KTY 11 / 6 FUFY 11 / 6-0000 S FUFY 11 / 6-0001 S FUFY 11 / 6-0003 S
SN 090 009 SN 090 049 SN 090 019
LM 235 Z FUFLM-0000 S FUFLM-0001 S FUFLM-0003 S
SN 090 150 SN 090 151 SN 090 152 Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 107


Room temperature sensor FUF – flush installation
with or without control elements

Technical data
LED:
green, max. 24 V~/=
Key-button:
max. 35mA, 24 V~/=
Rotary switch:
max. 130mA, 24 V~/=
Weight:
80 g

For further details,


see page 106

Sensor Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG

PT 100 FUFP 100-0004 S FUFP 100-0027 S FUFP 100-0028 S


SN 090 020 SN 090 120 SN 090 080
PT 1000 FUFP 1000-0004 S FUFP 1000-0027 S FUFP 1000-0028 S
SN 090 021 SN 090 121 SN 090 081
NI 1000 FUFN 1000-0004 S FUFN 1000-0027 S FUFN 1000-0028 S
SN 090 022 SN 090 122 SN 090 082
NI 1000 FUFN 1000 S FUFN 1000 S FUFN 1000 S
TK 5000 TK 5000-0004 TK 5000-0027 TK 5000-0028
SN 090 023 SN 090 123 SN 090 083
NTC 1 K 8 FUFC 18-0004 S FUFC 18-0027 S FUFC 18-0028 S
SN 090 171 SN 090 173 SN 090 175
NTC 3 K FUFC 03-0004 S FUFC 03-0027 S FUFC 03-0028 S
SN 090 024 SN 090 124 SN 090 084
NTC 10 K FUFC 10-0004 S FUFC 10-0027 S FUFC 10-0028 S
SN 090 025 SN 090 125 SN 090 085
NTC 10 K Prekon FUFC 10 PRE-0004 S FUFC 10 PRE-0027 S FUFC 10 PRE-0028 S
SN 090 026 SN 090 126 SN 090 086
NTC 20 K FUFC 20-0004 S FUFC 20-0027 S FUFC 20-0028 S
SN 090 027 SN 090 127 SN 090 087
NTC 30 K FUFC 30-0004 S FUFC 30-0027 S FUFC 30-0028 S
SN 090 172 SN 090 174 SN 090 176
NTC 50 K FUFC 50-0004 S FUFC 50-0027 S FUFC 50-0028 S
SN 090 028 SN 090 128 SN 090 088
KTY 11 / 6 FUFY 11 / 6-0004 S FUFY 11 / 6-0027 S FUFY 11 / 6-0028 S
SN 090 029 SN 090 129 SN 090 089
LM 235 Z FUFLM-0004 S FUFLM-0027 S FUFLM-0028 S
SN 090 153 SN 090 154 SN 090 155

Accessory Item No. Colour PG

Frame UN 990 002 pure white (similar to RAL 9010), neutral S

Catalogue 2007 | Page 108


Room temperature sensor FUF – flush installation
with or without control elements

Technical data
LED:
green and red,
max. 24 V~/=
Potentiometer:
standard 5KΩ
Weight:
80 g

For further details,


see page 106

Sensor Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG

PT 100 FUFP 100-P0500 S FUFP 100-P0501 S FUFP 100-P0502 S


SN 090 030 SN 090 130 SN 090 140
PT 1000 FUFP 1000-P0500 S FUFP 1000-P0501 S FUFP 1000-P0502 S
SN 090 031 SN 090 131 SN 090 141
NI 1000 FUFN 1000-P0500 S FUFN 1000-P0501 S FUFN 1000-P0502 S
SN 090 032 SN 090 132 SN 090 142
NI 1000 FUFN 1000 S FUFN 1000 S FUFN 1000 S
TK 5000 TK 5000-P0500 TK 5000-P0501 TK 5000-P0502
SN 090 033 SN 090 133 SN 090 143
NTC 1 K 8 FUFC 18-P0500 S FUFC 18-P0501 S FUFC 18-P0502 S
SN 090 177 SN 090 179 SN 090 181
NTC 3 K FUFC 03-P0500 S FUFC 03-P0501 S FUFC 03-P0502 S
SN 090 034 SN 090 134 SN 090 144
NTC 10 K FUFC 10-P0500 S FUFC 10-P0501 S FUFC 10-P0502 S
SN 090 035 SN 090 135 SN 090 145
NTC 10 K Prekon FUFC 10 PRE-P0500 S FUFC 10 PRE-P0501 S FUFC 10 PRE-P0502 S
SN 090 036 SN 090 136 SN 090 146
NTC 20 K FUFC 20-P0500 S FUFC 20-P0501 S FUFC 20-P0502 S
SN 090 037 SN 090 137 SN 090 147
NTC 30 K FUFC 30-P0500 S FUFC 30-P0501 S FUFC 30-P0502 S
SN 090 178 SN 090 180 SN 090 182
NTC 50 K FUFC 50-P0500 S FUFC 50-P0501 S FUFC 50-P0502 S
SN 090 038 SN 090 138 SN 090 148
KTY 11 / 6 FUFY 11 / 6-P0500 S FUFY 11 / 6-P0501 S FUFY 11 / 6-P0502 S
SN 090 039 SN 090 139 SN 090 149
LM 235 Z FUFLM-P0500 S FUFLM-P0501 S FUFLM-P0502 S
SN 090 156 SN 090 157 SN 090 158

Accessory Item No. Colour PG


Sensors

Frame UN 990 002 pure white (similar to RAL 9010), neutral S

Catalogue 2007 | Page 109


Room temperature sensor FUF – flush installation
with or without control elements

Technical data
LED:
green and red,
max. 24 V~/=
Potentiometer:
standard 5KΩ
Rocker switch:
1 A/30 V~/42 V~/=
Key-button:
max. 35mA, 24 V~/=
Weight:
80 g

For further details,


see page 106

Sensor Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG

PT 100 FUFP 100-P0503 S FUFP 100-P0504 S FUFP 100-P0509 S


SN 090 050 SN 090 060 SN 090 090
PT 1000 FUFP 1000-P0503 S FUFP 1000-P0504 S FUFP 1000-P0509 S
SN 090 051 SN 090 061 SN 090 091
NI 1000 FUFN 1000-P0503 S FUFN 1000-P0504 S FUFN 1000-P0509 S
SN 090 052 SN 090 062 SN 090 092
NI 1000 FUFN 1000 S FUFN 1000 S FUFN 1000 S
TK 5000 TK 5000-P0503 TK 5000-P0504 TK 5000-P0509
SN 090 053 SN 090 063 SN 090 093
NTC 1 K 8 FUFC 18-P0503 S FUFC 18-P0504 S FUFC 18-P0509 S
SN 090 183 SN 090 185 SN 090 187
NTC 3 K FUFC 03-P0503 S FUFC 03-P0504 S FUFC 03-P0509 S
SN 090 054 SN 090 064 SN 090 094
NTC 10 K FUFC 10-P0503 S FUFC 10-P0504 S FUFC 10-P0509 S
SN 090 055 SN 090 065 SN 090 095
NTC 10 K Prekon FUFC 10 PRE-P0503 S FUFC 10 PRE-P0504 S FUFC 10 PRE-P0509 S
SN 090 056 SN 090 066 SN 090 096
NTC 20 K FUFC 20-P0503 S FUFC 20-P0504 S FUFC 20-P0509 S
SN 090 057 SN 090 067 SN 090 097
NTC 30 K FUFC 30-P0503 S FUFC 30-P0504 S FUFC 30-P0509 S
SN 090 184 SN 090 186 SN 090 188
NTC 50 K FUFC 50-P0503 S FUFC 50-P0504 S FUFC 50-P0509 S
SN 090 058 SN 090 068 SN 090 098
KTY 11 / 6 FUFY 11 / 6-P0503 S FUFY 11 / 6-P0504 S FUFY 11 / 6-P0509 S
SN 090 059 SN 090 069 SN 090 099
LM 235 Z FUFLM-P0503 S FUFLM-P0504 S FUFLM-P0509 S
SN 090 159 SN 090 160 SN 090 161

Accessory Item No. Colour PG

Frame UN 990 002 pure white (similar to RAL 9010), neutral S

Catalogue 2007 | Page 110


Room temperature sensor FUF – flush installation
with or without control elements

Technical data
LED:
green and red,
max. 24 V~/=
Potentiometer:
standard 5KΩ
Rocker switch:
1 A/30 V~/42 V=
Rotary switch:
max. 130mA, 24 V~/=
Weight:
80 g

For further details,


see page 106

Sensor Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG Type/Item No. PG

PT 100 FUFP 100-P0510 S FUFP 100-P0511 S FUFP 100-P0527 S


SN 090 100 SN 090 110 SN 090 070
PT 1000 FUFP 1000-P0510 S FUFP 1000-P0511 S FUFP 1000-P0527 S
SN 090 101 SN 090 111 SN 090 071
NI 1000 FUFN 1000-P0510 S FUFN 1000-P0511 S FUFN 1000-P0527 S
SN 090 102 SN 090 112 SN 090 072
NI 1000 FUFN 1000 S FUFN 1000 S FUFN 1000 S
TK 5000 TK 5000-P0510 TK 5000-P0511 TK 5000-P0527
SN 090 103 SN 090 113 SN 090 073
NTC 1 K 8 FUFC 18-P0510 S FUFC 18-P0511 S FUFC 18-P0527 S
SN 090 189 SN 090 191 SN 090 193
NTC 3 K FUFC 03-P0510 S FUFC 03-P0511 S FUFC 03-P0527 S
SN 090 104 SN 090 114 SN 090 074
NTC 10 K FUFC 10-P0510 S FUFC 10-P0511 S FUFC 10-P0527 S
SN 090 105 SN 090 115 SN 090 075
NTC 10 K Prekon FUFC 10 PRE-P0510 S FUFC 10 PRE-P0511 S FUFC 10 PRE-P0527 S
SN 090 106 SN 090 116 SN 090 076
NTC 20 K FUFC 20-P0510 S FUFC 20-P0511 S FUFC 20-P0527 S
SN 090 107 SN 090 117 SN 090 077
NTC 30 K FUFC 30-P0510 S FUFC 30-P0511 S FUFC 30-P0527 S
SN 090 190 SN 090 192 SN 090 194
NTC 50 K FUFC 50-P0510 S FUFC 50-P0511 S FUFC 50-P0527 S
SN 090 108 SN 090 118 SN 090 078
KTY 11 / 6 FUFY 11 / 6-P0510 S FUFY 11 / 6-P0511 S FUFY 11 / 6-P0527 S
SN 090 109 SN 090 119 SN 090 079
LM 235 Z FUFLM-P0510 S FUFLM-P0511 S FUFLM-P0527 S
SN 090 162 SN 090 163 SN 090 164

Accessory Item No. Colour PG


Sensors

Frame UN 990 002 pure white (similar to RAL 9010), neutral S

Catalogue 2007 | Page 111


Outdoor temperature sensor AF with passive output
AF … Outdoor temperature sensor with internal sensor
AF Technical data Application
Measuring range: – 30 … + 100°C For the detection of temperatures that
exist outdoors or in wet room environ-
Sensors: see table
ments, cold storages and greenhouses
Tolerance classes: PT100/PT1000 NI DIN EN 60751 B and in the industrial field. The devices
1000 DIN EN 43760 B are specially protected against the
influence of dust and humidity. In the
Measurement current: max. 3 mA event the sensor is exposed to direct
Connector type: 2-wire, 0.14 up to 2.5 mm2 solar radiation, the use of a a special
(standard) max. cable length 50 m protector is recommended.

Dimensioned drawing: polyamide 30 %, fibreglass reinforced


Colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010
Degree of protection: IP 65
Sensor characteristics: page 162 – 163

Type Item No. Sensor PG

AFP 100 G9 040 010 PT 100 S


AFP 1000 G9 040 020 PT 1000 S
AFN 1000 G9 040 030 NI 1000 S
AFN 1000 TK 5000 G9 040 040 NI 1000 TK 5000 S
AFC 18 G9 040 050 NTC 1 K 8 S
AFC 03 G9 040 060 NTC 3 K S
AFC 10 G9 040 070 NTC 10 K S
AFC 10 PRE G9 040 080 NTC 10 K Prekon S
AFC 20 G9 040 090 NTC 20 K S
AFC 30 G9 040 100 NTC 30 K S
AFC 50 G9 040 110 NTC 50 K S
AFY 11 / 6 G9 040 120 KTY 11 / 6 S
AFLM G9 040 130 LM 235 Z S

AF-0 G9 040 360 “0” (NTC 2 K 25) S


AF-1 G9 040 370 “1” (NTC 1 K) S
AF-2 G9 040 380 “2” (NTC 47 K) S
AF-3 G9 040 390 “3” (NTC 8 K) S
AF-4 G9 040 400 “4” (NTC 10 K) S
AF-8 G9 040 410 “8” (NTC 2 K) S
AF-51 G9 040 420 “51” (PTC 1 K) S

Optional PG

PT-100 class A S
PT-100 1⁄3 DIN S
PT-100 1⁄10 DIN S
PT-1000 1⁄3 DIN S
3-wire connection S
4-wire connection S

Accessories PG

Protector 01 (ball- / sun- / rain protection), stainless steel V4A 1.4571, G9990170 S

Catalogue 2007 | Page 112


Outdoor temperature sensor AF with passive output
AF … Outdoor temperature sensor with internally arranged sensing element
Dimensioned drawing Sensor connection diagram

Protector 01

Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 113


Outdoor temperature sensor AFH / AFHM with passive and active output
AFH … Outdoor sensor with led-through sensor sleeve
AFHM … Outdoor temperature sensor with measuring transducer 0 –10 V or 4 – 20 mA with led-through
sensor sleeve
Technical data Application
Measuring range: passive: – 30 … + 100ºC For the detection of temperatures that
active: – 50 … +50°C/0 … 50°C exist outdoors or in wet room environ-
ments, cold storages and greenhouses
Sensors: see table
and in the industrial field. The devices
Outputs: 0–10 V or 4–20 mA are specially protected against the
influence of dust and humidity. The
Tolerance classes: PT100/PT1000 DIN EN 60751 B response characteristic of this outdoor
NI 1000 DIN EN 43760 B sensor is, owing to the externally arran-
Measurement current: max. 3 mA ged sensor sleeve, excellent in respect
to temperature changes.
Connector type: 2-wire, 0.14 up to 2.5 mm2 The active outdoor sensor model AFHM
(standard) max. cable length 50 m transduces, in a temperature-linear
Dimensioned drawing: polyamide 30 %, fibreglass reinforced manner, the temperature-dependent
resistance of the sensor to a current
Colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 signal of 4 to 20 mA or to a voltage
Connecting cable: 0.14 up to 1.5 mm2 signal of 0 to 10 V.
In the event the sensor is exposed to
Degree of protection: IP 65 direct solar radiation, the use of a a
special protector is recommended.
Sensor characteristics: page 162 – 163

Type Item No. Sensor PG

AFHP 100 G9 040 160 PT 100 S


AFHP 1000 G9 040 170 PT 1000 S
AFHN 1000 G9 040 180 NI 1000 S
AFHN 1000 TK 5000 G9 040 190 NI 1000 TK 5000 S
AFHC 18 G9 040 200 NTC 1 K 8 S
AFHC 03 G9 040 210 NTC 3 K S
AFHC 10 G9 040 220 NTC 10 K S
AFHC 10 PRE G9 040 230 NTC 10 K Prekon S
AFHC 20 G9 040 240 NTC 20 K S
AFHC 30 G9 040 250 NTC 30 K S
AFHC 50 G9 040 260 NTC 50 K S
AFHY 11/6 G9 040 270 KTY 11 / 6 S
AFHLM G9 040 280 LM 235 Z S

Outdoor temperature sensor (active) Item No. Output Measuring range PG

AFHM/0–10 G9 040 290 0–10 V – 50 … + 50°C S


AFHM/4–20 G9 040 300 4–20 mA – 50 … + 50°C S

Outdoor temperature sensor (active) Item No. Output Measuring range PG

AFHM/2/0–10 G9 040 451 0–10 V 0 … + 50°C S


AFHM/2/4–20 G9 040 351 4–20 mA 0 … + 50°C S
Other measuring ranges S

Accessories PG

Protector 01 (ball- / sun- / rain protection), stainless steel V4A 1.4571, G999017023,10 / S S

Catalogue 2007 | Page 11


Outdoor temperature sensor AFH/AFHM with passive and active output
AFH …Outdoor temperature sensor with led-through sensor sleeve
AFHM … Outdoor temperature sensor with measuring transducer 0 –10 V or 4 – 20 mA with led-through
sensor sleeve

Optional PG

PT-100 class A S
PT-100 1⁄3 DIN S
PT-100 1⁄10 DIN S
PT-1000 1⁄3 DIN S
3-wire connection S
4-wire connection S
Other measuring ranges S

Dimensioned drawing Sensor connection diagram

0 –10 V, connection diagram 4 – 20 mA, connection diagram

Protector 01
Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 115


Sleeve type temperature sensor HF
HF … /P, sleeve type temperature sensor with PVC cable
Technical data (HF.../P and HF.../S) Application
Measuring range: PVC cable – 35 … + 80ºC For the detection of temperatures in
silicone cable – 50 … + 150ºC liquid or gasiform media.
(LM235Z max.125ºC) Especially its rolled, humidity proof
design ensures the protection of the
Sensors: see table
sleeve sensor against moisture and
Tolerance classes: PT100/PT1000 DIN EN 60751 B dust.
NI1000 DIN EN 43760 B
A dip sleeve is needed when using
Cable: 1m (2 x 0.5 mm2 – Standard) the device in liquid types of media.
Length of sleeve: 45 mm, Ø 6 mm
Measurement current: max. 3 mA
Degree of protection: IP 65, humidity proof rolled design
Sensor sleeve: stainless steel, V2A 1.4301
Dip sleeves: page 157
Sensor characteristics: page 162 – 163

Type Item No. Sensor PG

HFP 100/P G9 030 010 PT 100 S


HFP 1000/P G9 030 020 PT 1000 S
HFN 1000/P G9 030 030 NI 1000 S
HFN 1000 TK 5000/P G9 030 040 NI 1000 TK 5000 S
HFC18/P G9 030 050 NTC 1 K 8 S
HFC 03/P G9 030 060 NTC 3 K S
HFC 10/P G9 030 070 NTC 10 K S
HFC 10 PRE/P G9 030 080 NTC 10 K Prekon S
HFC 20/P G9 030 090 NTC 20 K S
HFC 30/P G9 030 100 NTC 30 K S
HFC 50/P G9 030 110 NTC 50 K S
HFY 11/6/P G9 030 120 KTY 11/6 S
HFLM/P G9 030 130 LM 235 Z S

PVC cable options PG

PVC connecting cable (2 conductors), running metre S


3-wire connection, per m S
3-wire connection (shielded), per m S
4-wire connection, per m S
4-wire connection (shielded), per m S

Optional PG

PT-100 class A S
PT-100 1⁄3 DIN S
PT-100 1⁄10 DIN S
PT-1000 1⁄3 DIN S

Catalogue 2007 | Page 116


Sleeve type temperature sensor HF
HF … /S Sleeve type temperature sensor with silicone cable

Type Item No. Sensor PG

HFP 100/S G9 030 140 PT 100 S


HFP 1000/S G9 030 150 PT 1000 S
HFN 1000/S G9 030 160 NI 1000 S
HFN 1000 TK 5000/S G9 030 170 NI 1000 TK 5000 S
HFC 18/S G9 030 180 NTC 1 K 8 S
HFC 03/S G9 030 190 NTC 3 K S
HFC 10/S G9 030 200 NTC 10 K S
HFC 10 PRE/S G9 030 210 NTC 10 K Prekon S
HFC 20/S G9 030 220 NTC 20 K S
HFC 30/S G9 030 230 NTC 30 K S
HFC 50/S G9 030 240 NTC 50 K S
HFY 11/6/S G9 030 250 KTY 11 / 6 S
HFLM/S G9 030 260 LM 235 Z S

Silicone cable options PG

Silicone connecting cable (2 conductors), running metre S


3-wire connection, per m S
3-wire connection (shielded), per m S
4-wire connection, per m S
4-wire connection (shielded), per m S
Teflon cable, per m S

Optional PG

PT-100 class A S
PT-100 1⁄3 DIN S
PT-100 1⁄10 DIN S
PT-1000 1⁄3 DIN S

Dimensioned drawing

Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 117


Sleeve type temperature sensor HF
(Remote sensor for ALRE standard devices, e.g. ITR79 …)
Technical data Application
Ambient temperature with PE cable: –50...+100°C For the measuring of temperatures in
Ambient temperature with silicone cable: –50...+150°C liquid media after installation into a dip
sleeve (TH/NTH). If other sensor lengths
Ambient temperature with PVC cable: –35...+80°C
than those listed below need to be met,
Degree of protection: IP 65 the sensor models of the GFL series
Sensor line (extendable up to): NTC 50 m, (see as of page 126) are ideal for this
PTC 100 m purpose. Also suited for the measuring
Sensor characteristics: page 162 – 163 of temperatures in air ducts or in non-
aggressive types of gas when installed
into a protective spiral (SW-200, see
pages 154 – 155).

(Please pay regard to the EMC directives. Avoid parallel laying of sensor line and mains supply cables or use shielded sensor lines).
The sensor is cast into a V2 A sleeve (except … K = plastic sleeve). Time constant approx. 20 s in moved water.

Type Item No. Sensor PG

HF-0 D4 779 114 “0” (NTC 2 K 25) PE cable, 1.5 m S


HF-0/6 D4 779 126 “0” (NTC 2 K 25) PE cable, 6 m S
HF-1 D4 779 203 “1” (NTC 1K) PE cable, 1.5 m S
HF-2 D4 779 823 “2” (NTC 47 K) PE cable, 1.5 m S
HF-3 D4 779 090 “3” (NTC 8 K) PE cable, 1.5 m S
HF-3/6 D4 779 102 “3” (NTC 8 K) PE cable, 6 m S
HF-4 D4 779 088 “4” (NTC 10 K) PE cable, 1.5 m S
HF-4/6 D4 779 710 “4” (NTC 10 K) PE cable, 6 m S
HF-5 D4 779 025 “5” (NTC 50 K) PE cable, 1.5 m S
HF-5/4 K D4 771 246 “5” (NTC 50 K) silicone cable, 4 m S
HF-5/6 D4 779 619 “5” (NTC 50 K) PE cable, 6 m S
HF-6 D4 779 037 “6” (NTC 100 K) silicone cable, 1.5 m S
HF-6/3 D4 779 835 “6” (NTC 100 K) silicone cable, 3 m S
HF-8/4 K2 G8 000 370 “8” (NTC 2 K) PVC cable (VDE) 4 m S
acc. to DIN 44574
HF-8/6 K2 G8 000 368 “8” (NTC 2 K) PVC cable (VDE) 6 m S
acc. to DIN 44574
HF-51 D4 779 429 “51” (PTC 1K) silicone cable, 1.5 m S
HF-51/6 D4 779 746 “51” (PTC 1K) silicone cable, 6 m S
HF-57 D4 771 286 “57” (PTC 2 K) PE cable, 1.5 m S
HF-100 D4 771 184 PT-100 silicone cable, 1.5 m (4-wire) S
HF-100/6 D4 771 185 PT-100 silicone cable, 6 m (4-wire) S
HF-1000 D4 771 130 PT-1000 silicone cable, 1.5 m S

* Attention: bigger diameter (Ø 8.9 mm) required for TH/NTH 140, see page 156

HF, dimensioned drawing HF-8/4K2, dimensioned drawing HF-5/4K3, dimensioned drawing

Catalogue 2007 | Page 118


Air temperature sensor LF
(Remote sensor for ALRE standard devices, e.g. ITR79 …)
Technical data Application
Measuring range: PE cable, –50...+80°C For the measuring of temperatures in
Sensors: see table air ducts or non-aggressive types of
gas. Installation into a protective spiral
Tolerance classes: PT100/PT 1000 DIN EN 60751 B
(SW-200) required.
Cable: 2 x 0.34 mm2
Measurement current: max. 3 mA
Degree of protection: IP 65
Sensor characteristics: page 162 – 163

(Please pay regard to the EMC directives. Avoid parallel laying of sensor line and mains supply cables or use shielded lines).
Covered water-tight by means of a shrink-down plastic tubing. Time constant approx. 10 s in moved air (2 m/s).

Type Item No. Sensor PG

LF-20 D4 779 330 “0” (NTC 2 K 25) PE cable, 1.5 m S


LF-21 D4 771 134 “1” (NTC 1 K) PE cable, 1.5 m S
LF-22 D4 779 239 “2” (NTC 47 K) PE cable, 1.5 m S
LF-23 D4 779 355 “3” (NTC 8 K) PE cable, 1.5 m S
LF-24 D4 771 133 “4” (NTC 10 K) PE cable, 1.5 m S
LF-24/4 D4 779 660 “4” (NTC 10 K) PE cable, 4 m S
LF-25 D4 779 367 “5” (NTC 50 K) PE cable, 1.5 m S
LF-25/4 D4 771 199 “5” (NTC 50 K) PE cable, 4 m S
LF-8/4 D4 771 210 “8” (NTC 2 K) PE cable, 4 m S
LF-51 D4 771 149 “51” (PTC 1K) PE cable, 1.5 m S
LF-51/6 D4 771 159 “51” (PTC 1K) PE cable, 6 m S
LF-100 D4 771 179 PT-100 PE cable, 1.5 m S
LF-1000 D4 771 206 PT-1000 PE cable, 1.5 m S

Accessory

Type Item No. Length ∅ Screwed connection Diameter Material PG

SW-200 C1 809 219 200 mm 8 mm 11 x 17 mm nickel-plated steel K

LF, dimensioned drawing SW-200, dimensioned drawing

Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 119


Room pendulum temperature sensor PF
Room radiation temperature sensor STF
PF Technical data Application
Room pendulum temperature sensor The room pendulum temperature
sensor PF serves for the detection of
Measuring range: – 30 … + 80°C
temperatures in larger rooms. Owing
Sensors: see table to its ball shape, the sensor picks up
Tolerance classes: PT100/PT1000 DIN EN 60751 B the temperatures from all directions
NI1000 DIN EN 43760 B within the room which, if positioned
Cable length: 1 m PVC, 2 x 0.5 mm2 (standard) correctly, enables to obtain represen-
extendable up to max. 50 m tative measuring results.
Material of hemisphere: aluminium, black
Measurement current: max. 3 mA
Degree of protection: IP 65

Room radiation temperature sensor


The room radiation temperature
STF Ambient temperature: – 35 … + 100°C sensor is a double sensor that enables
Degree of protection: IP 30 to detect the temperatures developed
by heat radiation sources that exist
Conductor cross section: 0.14 up to 1.5 mm2 within rooms. The radiation sensor is
Measurement current: max. 3 mA integrated in the black hemisphere
while the room temperature sensor is
Sensor line: extendable up to: located inside the plastic housing. The
NTC up to 50 m connection is realised by means of
PTC up to 100 m screw terminals.
Fastening: wall mounting or installation on an
UP box
Colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010,
black hemisphere
Weight: 60 g
Sensor characteristics: page 162 – 163

Type Item No. Sensor PG

PFP 100 G9130010 PT 100 S


PFP 1000 G9130020 PT 1000 S
PFN 1000 G9130030 NI 1000 S
PFN 1000 TK 5000 G9130040 NI 1000 TK 5000 S
PFC18 G9130050 NTC 1 K 8 S
PFC 03 G9130060 NTC 3 K S
PFC 10 G9130070 NTC 10 K S
PFC 10 PRE G9130080 NTC 10 K Prekon S
PFC 20 G9130090 NTC 20 K S
PFC 30 G9130100 NTC 30 K S
PFC 50 G9130110 NTC 50 K S
PFY 11/6 G9130120 KTY 11/6 S
PFLM G9130130 LM 235 Z S

Options PG

2-conductor PVC connecting cable, running metre S


3-wire connection, per m S
3-wire connection with shielding, per m S
4-wire connection, per m S
4-wire connection with shielding, per m S
PT-100 class A S
PT-100 1⁄3 DIN S
PT-100 1⁄10 DIN S
PT-1000 1⁄3 DIN S

Catalogue 2007 | Page 120


Room pendulum temperature sensor PF
Room radiation temperature sensor STF
Type Item No. Sensor Equipment PG

STF-0 SN080100 NTC 2 K 25 2 NTC sensors “0” S


STF-2 SN080200 NTC 47 K 2 NTC sensors “2” S
STF-4 SN080400 NTC 10 K 2 NTC sensors “4” S
STF-51 SN080500 PTC 1 K 2 NTC sensors “51” S

PF, dimensioned drawing STF, dimensioned drawing

STF, connection diagram

. Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 121


Mean temperature sensor MWF with passive and active output
MWF … Mean temperature sensor with passive output
MWFM … Mean temperature sensor with measuring transducer 0 – 10 V or 4 – 20 mA
Technical data Application
Measuring range: For the detection of the main tempe-
passive: – 30 … + 100°C rature prevailing in gasiform media
active: – 20 … + 80°C that flow in air ducts or of the main
temperature in air flows produced by
Passive sensor: see table
coil heating systems or drying ovens.
Tolerance classes, passive: PT100/PT1000 DIN EN 60751 B The device enables to measure the
NI1000 DIN EN 43760 B temperature over the entire length of
the sensor line.
Sensor length (rod): 0.4 m, 3 m, 6 m, copper tube Ø 4 mm
Measurement current max. 3 mA The mean temperature model MWFM
passive: transduces, in a temperature-linear
manner, the temperature-dependent
Connector type, passive: 2-wire, 0.14 – 2.5 mm2 resistance of the sensor to a voltage
Dimensioned drawing: polyamide 30% fibreglass reinforced, signal of 0 to 10 V or to a current
max. 100°C signal of 4 to 20 mA. The measuring
transducer is delivered tuned to the
Colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 measuring range -20 … +80°C.
Degree of protection: IP 65
Laying: smallest bending radius 30 mm,
on installation clips
Sensor characteristic, page 162 – 163
passive:
Active outputs: 0 – 10 V or 4 – 20 mA
Connecting cable, active: 0.14 – 1.5 mm2

Type Item No. Sensor length Sensor PG

MWFP 1000/3-Cu G9120210 3m PT 1000 S

MWFP 1000/6-Cu G9120220 6m PT 1000 S

MWFN 1000/6-Cu G9120230 6m Ni 1000 S

MWFN 1000 TK 5000/0,4-Cu G9120240 0.4 m Ni 1000 TK 5000 S

MWFN 1000 TK 5000/3-Cu G9120250 3m Ni 1000 TK 5000 S

MWFN 1000 TK 5000/6-Cu G9120260 6m Ni 1000 TK 5000 S

Mean temperature sensor with measuring transducer 0 –10 V

Type Item No. Sensor length Output Measuring range PG

MWFM/0–10/0,4-Cu G9120270 0.4 m 0 – 10 V -20…+80°C S

MWFM/0–10/6-Cu G9120280 6m 0 – 10 V -20…+80°C S

Mean temperature sensor with measuring transducer 4 – 20 mA

Type Item No. Sensor length Output Measuring range PG

MWFM/4–20/6-Cu G9120200 6m 4 – 20 mA -20…+80°C S

Accessories PG

JZ-05/6M C 1809474 1 set of installation clips (six metal pieces) K

MF G9990160 installation flange S

Optional

MWF also available with a length of 12 m

Catalogue 2007 | Page 122


Mean temperature sensor MWF with passive and active output
MWF … Mean temperature sensor with passive output
MWF… Mean temperature sensor with measuring transducer 0 – 10 or 4 – 20 mA
MWF, dimensioned drawing

JZ-05/6m MWFM 0…10 V, wiring diagram

MWF, wiring diagram (passive) MWFM 4 ... 20mA, wiring diagram

Sensors

Installation flange MF

Catalogue 2007 | Page 123


Built-in duct sensor EKF / GFL
with passive output
Technical data Application
Measuring range: – 30 … + 150°C For the measuring of temperatures
(LM 235 Z max.125°C) in liquids and gases that flow in
Sensor: see table pipes, conduits, air ducts, reservoirs,
tanks or containers. If provided for
Tolerance classes: PT 100 / PT 1000 DIN EN 60751 B
the application in air ducts, the use
NI 1000 DIN EN 43760 B
of a special installation flange is
Measurement current: max. 3 mA required. If provided for use in liquids,
Electric connections: 2-wire, 0.14 up to 2.5 mm2 nickel-plated dip sleeves need to be
Dimensioned drawing: applied. In aggressive media, the use
of dip sleeves of stainless steel (V4A)
Material: polyamide 30 % fibreglass reinforced
is recommended. Dip sleeves or
Colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 installation flanges are not included
Ambient temperature: max. + 70°C in the scope of the delivery and need
to be ordered seperately as an
Degree of protection: IP 65 accessory.
Equipment: bayonet locks
Sensor tube: V2A 1.4301 / 6 mm Ø
regarding length, see table
Dip sleeves: nickel-plated brass or V4A
overview / lengths
page 157
Installation flange: page 157
Sensor characteristics: page 162 – 163

Sensor Installation length 65 mm Installation length 115 mm Installation length 165 mm PG


(for 50 mm dip sleeves) (for 100 mm dip sleeves) (for 150 mm dip sleeves)

PT 100 Type: EKFP 100/50 Type: EKFP 100/100 Type: EKFP 100/150 S
Item No.: G9140010 Item No.: G9140140 Item No.: G9140270

PT 1000 Type: EKFP 1000/50 Type: EKFP 1000/100 Type: EKFP 1000/150 S
Item No.: G9140020 Item No.: G9140150 Item No.: G9140280

NI 1000 Type: EKFN 1000/50 Type: EKFN 1000/100 Type: EKFN 1000/150 S
Item No.: G9140030 Item No.: G9140160 Item No.: G9140290

NI 1000 Type: EKFN 1000 TK 5000/50 Type: EKFN 1000 TK 5000/100 Type: EKFN 1000 TK 5000/150 S
TK 5000 Item No.: G9140040 Item No.: G9140170 Item No.: G9140300

NTC 1 K 8 Type: EKFC 18/50 Type: EKFC 18/100 Type: EKFC 18/150 S
Item No.: G9140050 Item No.: G9140180 Item No.: G9140310

NTC 3 K Type: EKFC 03/50 Type: EKFC 03/100 Type: EKFC 03/150 S
Item No.: G9140060 Item No.: G9140190 Item No.: G9140320

NTC 10 K Type: EKFC 10/50 Type: EKFC 10/100 Type: EKFC 10/150 S
Item No.: G9140070 Item No.: G9140200 Item No.: G9140330

NTC 10 K Type: EKFC 10 PRE/50 Type: EKFC 10 PRE/100 Type: EKFC 10 PRE/150 S
Prekon Item No.: G9140080 Item No.: G9140210 Item No.: G9140340

NTC 20 K Type: EKFC 20/50 Type: EKFC 20/100 Type: EKFC 20/150 S
Item No.: G9140090 Item No.: G9140220 Item No.: G9140350

NTC 30 K Type: EKFC 30/50 Type: EKFC 30/100 Type: EKFC 30/150 S
Item No.: G9140100 Item No.: G9140230 Item No.: G9140360

Catalogue 2007 | Page 12


Built-in duct sensor EKF / GFL
with passive output

Sensor Installation length 65 mm Installation length 115 mm Installation length 165 mm PG


(for 50 mm dip sleeves) (for 100 mm dip sleeves) (for 150 mm dip sleeves)

NTC 50 K Type: EKFC 50/50 Type: EKFC 50/100 Type: EKFC 50/150 S
Item No.: G9140110 Item No.: G9140240 Item No.: G9140370

KTY 11/6 Type: EKFY 11/6/50 Type: EKFY 11/6/100 Type: EKFY 11/6/150 S
Item No.: G9140120 Item No.: G9140250 Item No.: G9140380

LM 235 Z Type: EKFLM/50 Type: EKFLM/100 Type: EKFLM/150 S


Item No.: G9140130 Item No.: G9140260 Item No.: G9140390

Sensor Installation length 215 mm Installation length 265 mm Installation length 315 mm PG
(for 200 mm dip sleeves) (for 250 mm dip sleeves) (for 300 mm dip sleeves)

PT 100 Type: EKFP 100/200 Type: EKFP 100/250 Type: EKFP 100/300 S
Item No.: G9140400 Item No.: G9140530 Item No.: G9141581

PT 1000 Type: EKFP 1000/200 Type: EKFP 1000/250 Type: EKFP 1000/300 S
Item No.: G9140410 Item No.: G9140540 Item No.: G9141421

NI 1000 Type: EKFN 1000/200 Type: EKFN 1000/250 Type: EKFN 1000/300 S
Item No.: G9140420 Item No.: G9140550 Item No.: G9141521

NI 1000 Type: EKFN 1000 TK 5000/200 Type: EKFN 1000 TK 5000/250 Type: EKFN 1000 TK 5000/300 S
TK 5000 Item No.: G9140430 Item No.: G9140560 Item No.: G9141591

NTC 1 K 8 Type: EKFC 18/200 Type: EKFC 18/250 Type: EKFC 18/300 S
Item No.: G9140440 Item No.: G9140570 Item No.: G9141601

NTC 3 K Type: EKFC 03/200 Type: EKFC 03/250 Type: EKFC 03/300 S
Item No.: G9140450 Item No.: G9140580 Item No.: G9141611

NTC 10 K Type: EKFC 10/200 Type: EKFC 10/250 Type: EKFC 10/300 S
Item No.: G9140460 Item No.: G9140590 Item No.: G9141621

NTC 10 K Type: EKFC 10 PRE/200 Type: EKFC 10 PRE/250 Type: EKFC 10 PRE/300 S
Prekon Item No.: G9140470 Item No.: G9140600 Item No.: G9141631 Sensors

NTC 20 K Type: EKFC 20/200 Type: EKFC 20/250 Type: EKFC 20/300 S
Item No.: G9140480 Item No.: G9140610 Item No.: G9141641

NTC 30 K Type: EKFC 30/200 Type: EKFC 30/250 Type: EKFC 30/300 S
Item No.: G9140490 Item No.: G9140620 Item No.: G9141651

NTC 50 K Type: EKFC 50/200 Type: EKFC 50/250 Type: EKFC 50/300 S
Item No.: G9140500 Item No.: G9140630 Item No.: G9141661

KTY 11/6 Type: EKFY 11/6/200 Type: EKFY 11/6/250 Type: EKFY 11/6/300 S
Item No.: G9140510 Item No.: G9140640 Item No.: G9141671

Catalogue 2007 | Page 125


Built-in duct sensor EKF / GFL
with passive output

Sensor Installation length 215 mm Installation length 265 mm Installation length 315 mm PG
(for 200 mm dip sleeves) (for 250 mm dip sleeves) (for 300 mm dip sleeves)

LM 235 Z Type: EKFLM/200 Type: EKFLM/250 Type: EKFLM/300 S


Item No.: G9140520 Item No.: G9140650 Item No.: G 9141342

“0” (NTC 2 K 25) Type: GFL-0 S


Item No.: G9060010

“1” (NTC 1 K) Type: GFL-1 S


Item No.: G9060020

“2” (NTC 47 K) Type: GFL-2 S


Item No.: G9060030

“3” (NTC 8 K) Type: GFL-3 S


Item No.: G9060040

“4” (NTC 10 K) Type: GFL-4 S


Item No.: G9060050

“5” (NTC 50 K) Type: GFL-5 S


Item No.: G9060060

“51” (PTC 1 K) Type: GFL-51 S


Item No.: G9060070

Options PG

Other installation lengths: 50 mm each, max. length 1.000 mm S

3-wire connection S

4-wire connection S

PT-100 class A S

PT-100 1/3 DIN S

PT-100 1/10 DIN S

PT-1000 1/3 DIN S

Accessory PG

Installation flange MF S

Catalogue 2007 | Page 126


Built-in duct sensor EKF / GFL
with passive output
EKF/GFL, dimensioned drawing EKF, connection diagram

Installation flange MF, dimensioned drawing Dip sleeve THMs… / THV…,


dimensioned drawing

Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 127


Built-in duct sensor EKFM
with active output (measuring transducer 0 – 10 V or 4 – 20 mA)
Technical data Application
Measuring ranges: – 50 … + 50°C EKFM1 … For the measuring of temperatures in
0 … + 100°C EKFM2 … liquids and gases that flow in pipes,
0 … + 50°C EKFM3… conduits, air ducts, reservoirs, tanks
other measuring ranges on request or containers. The temperature-de-
Sensor: PT 100, DIN EN 60751, class B, pendent resistance of the sensor is,
3 conductors in a temperature-linear manner, being
transduced to a current signal of 4
Outputs: 0 … 10 V or 4 … 20 mA
to 20 mA or to a voltage signal of 0
Electrical connections: 0.14 up to 1.5 mm2 to 10 V. The measuring transducer
is delivered tuned to the following
Operating voltage: 24 V DC measuring ranges: – 50 … + 50°C,
Dimensioned drawing: 0 … + 50°C or 0 … + 100°C.
If provided for the application in air
Material: polyamide 30 % fibreglass reinforced ducts, the use of a special installation
Colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 flange is required. If provided for use
in liquids, nickel-plated dip sleeves
Ambient temperature: max. + 70°C need to be applied. In aggressive me-
Degree of protection: IP 65 dia, the use of dip sleeves of stainless
steel (V4A) is recommended. The
Equipment: bayonet locks dip sleeves or the installation flange
Sensor tube: V2A 1.4301 / 6 mm Ø are not included in the scope of the
regarding length, see table below delivery and need to be ordered
seperately as an accessory.
Admissible air moisture: < 95 % r.h.
Dip sleeves: nickel-plated brass or V4A,
overview / lengths, see page 157
Installation flange: page 157

Sensor tube Measuring range: –50 … +50˚C Measuring range: 0 … +100˚C Measuring range: 0 … +50˚C PG

Output Output Output Output Output Output


0 … 10 V 4 … 20 mA 0 … 10 V 4 … 20 mA 0 … 10 V 4 … 20 mA

65 mm Type: Type: Type: Type: Type: Type: S


(for 50 mm EKFM1/0-10/50 EKFM1/4-20/50 EKFM2/0-10/50 EKFM2/4-20/50 EKFM3/0-10/50 EKFM3/4-20/50
dip sleeve) Item: G9140660 Item: G9140670 Item: G9140760 Item: G9140770 Item: G9140860 Item: G9140870

115 mm Type: Type: Type: Type: Type: Type: S


(for 100 mm EKFM1/0-10/100 EKFM1/4-20/100 EKFM2/0-10/100 EKFM2/4-20/100 EKFM3/0-10/100 EKFM3/4-20/100
dip sleeve) Item: G9140680 Item: G9140690 Item: G9140780 Item: G9140790 Item: G9140880 Item: G9140890

165 mm Type: Type: Type: Type: Type: Type: S


(for 150 mm EKFM1/0-10/150 EKFM1/4-20/150 EKFM2/0-10/150 EKFM2/4-20/150 EKFM3/0-10/150 EKFM3/4-20/150
dip sleeve) Item: G9140700 Item: G9140710 Item: G9140800 Item: G9140810 Item: G9140900 Item: G9140910

215 mm Type: Type: Type: Type: Type: Type: S


(for 200 mm EKFM1/0-10/200 EKFM1/4-20/200 EKFM2/0-10/200 EKFM2/4-20/200 EKFM3/0-10/200 EKFM3/4-20/200
dip sleeve) Item: G9140720 Item: G9140730 Item: G9140820 Item: G9140830 Item: G9140920 Item: G9140930

265 mm Type: Type: Type: Type: Type: Type: S


(for 250 mm EKFM1/0-10/250 EKFM1/4-20/250 EKFM2/0-10/250 EKFM2/4-20/250 EKFM3/0-10/250 EKFM3/4-20/250
dip sleeve) Item: G9140740 Item: G9140750 Item: G9140840 Item: G9140850 Item: G9140940 Item: G9140950

315 mm Type: Type: Type: Type: Type: Type: S


(for 300 mm EKFM1/0-10/300 EKFM1/4-20/300 EKFM2/0-10/300 EKFM2/4-20/300 EKFM3/0-10/300 EKFM3/4-20/300
dip sleeve) Item: G9141681 Item: G9141691 Item: G9141701 Item: G9141711 Item: G9141721 Item: G9141731

Accessory

Installation flange MF S

Options PG

Other installation lengths: 50 mm each, max. 1.000 mm S

Other measuring ranges S

Catalogue 2007 | Page 128


Built-in duct sensor EKFM
with active output (measuring transducer 0 – 10 V or 4 – 20 mA)
EKFM, dimensioned drawing Dip sleeve, dimensioned drawing

Installation flange MF, dimensioned drawing EKFM, connection scheme

EKFM 4 ... 20 mA, connection scheme

Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 129


Industrial built-in duct sensor IKF1 (design B)
with passive output
Technical data Application
Measuring range: – 30 … + 150°C (LM 235 Z max. 125°C) For the measuring of temperatures
Sensor: see table in liquids and gases that flow in
pipes, conduits, air ducts, reser-
Tolerance classes: PT100/PT1000 DIN EN 60751 B
voirs, tanks or containers used in
NI1000 DIN EN 43760 B
the machine-, apparatus and plant
Measurement current: max. 3 mA engineering sphere. If provided for
Electrical connections: 2-wire, 0.14 up to 2.5 mm2 the application in air ducts, the use
Dimensioned drawing: aluminium, form B of a special installation flange is re-
quired. If provided for use in liquids,
Degree of protection: IP 43
nickel-plated dip sleeves need to
Sensor tube: V2A 1.4301 / 6 mm Ø be applied. In aggressive media, the
regarding length, see table use of dip sleeves of stainless steel
Dip sleeves: nickel-plated brass or V4A (V4A) is recommended. Dip sleeves
overview / lengths, see page 157 or installation flanges are not inclu-
Installation flange: page 157 ded in the scope of the delivery and
need to be ordered seperately as
Sensor characteristics: page 162 – 163
an accessory.
Ambient temperature
(housing): max. + 100°C

Sensor Installation length 65 mm Installation length 115 mm Installation length 165 mm PG


(for 50 mm dip sleeves) (for 100 mm dip sleeves) (for 150 mm dip sleeves)

PT 100 Type: IKF1P 100/50 Type: IKF1P 100/100 Type: IKF1P 100/150 S
Item No.: G9150010 Item No.: G9150140 Item No.: G9150270

PT 1000 Type: IKF1P 1000/50 Type: IKF1P 1000/100 Type: IKF1P 1000/150 S
Item No.: G9150020 Item No.: G9150150 Item No.: G9150280

NI 1000 Type: IKF1N 1000/50 Type: IKF1N 1000/100 Type: IKF1N 1000/150 S
Item No.: G9150030 Item No.: G9150160 Item No.: G9150290

NI 1000 Type: IKF1N 1000 TK 5000/50 Type: IKF1N 1000 TK 5000/100 Type: IKF1N 1000 TK 5000/150 S
TK 5000 Item No.: G9150040 Item No.: G9150170 Item No.: G9150300

NTC 1 K 8 Type: IKF1C 18/50 Type: IKF1C 18/100 Type: IKF1C 18/150 S
Item No.: G9150050 Item No.: G9150180 Item No.: G9150310

NTC 3 K Type: IKF1C 03/50 Type: IKF1C 03/100 Type: IKF1C 03/150 S
Item No.: G9150060 Item No.: G9150190 Item No.: G9150320

NTC 10 K Type: IKF1C 10/50 Type: IKF1C 10/100 Type: IKF1C 10/150 S
Item No.: G9150070 Item No.: G9150200 Item No.: G9150330

NTC 10 K Type: IKF1C 10 PRE/50 Type: IKF1C 10 PRE/100 Type: IKF1C 10 PRE/150 S
Prekon Item No.: G9150080 Item No.: G9150210 Item No.: G9150340

NTC 20 K Type: IKF1C 20/50 Type: IKF1C 20/100 Type: IKF1C 20/150 S
Item No.: G9150090 Item No.: G9150220 Item No.: G9150350

NTC 30 K Type: IKF1C 30/50 Type: IKF1C 30/100 Type: IKF1C 30/150 S
Item No.: G9150100 Item No.: G9150230 Item No.: G9150360

NTC 50 K Type: IKF1C 50/50 Type: IKF1C 50/100 Type: IKF1C 50/150 S
Item No.: G9150110 Item No.: G9150240 Item No.: G9150370

KTY 11/6 Type: IKF1Y 11/6/50 Type: IKF1Y 11/6/100 Type: IKF1Y 11/6/150 S
Item No.: G9150120 Item No.: G9150250 Item No.: G9150380

LM 235 Z Type: IKF1LM/50 Type: IKF1LM/100 Type: IKF1LM/150 S


Item No.: G9150130 Item No.: G9150260 Item No.: G9150390

Catalogue 2007 | Page 10


Industrial built-in duct sensor IKF1 (design B)
with passive output

Sensor Installation length 215 mm Installation length 265 mm Installation length 315 mm PG
(for 200 mm dip sleeves) (for 250 mm dip sleeves) (for 300 mm dip sleeves)

PT 100 Type: IKF1P 100/200 Type: IKF1P 100/250 Type: IKF1P 100/300 S
Item No.: G9150400 Item No.: G9150530 Item No.: G9151710

PT 1000 Type: IKF1P 1000/200 Type: IKF1P 1000/250 Type: IKF1P 1000/300 S
Item No.: G9150410 Item No.: G9150540 Item No.: G915117700

NI 1000 Type: IKF1N 1000/200 Type: IKF1N 1000/250 Type: IKF1N 1000/300 S
Item No.: G9150420 Item No.: G9150550 Item No.: G9151177

NI 1000 Type: IKF1N 1000 TK 5000/200 Type: IKF1N 1000 TK 5000/250 Type: IKF1N 1000 TK 5000/300 S
TK 5000 Item No.: G9150430 Item No.: G9150560 Item No.: G9151780

NTC 1 K 8 Type: IKF1C 18/200 Type: IKF1C 18/250 Type: IKF1C 18/300 S
Item No.: G9150440 Item No.: G9150570 Item No.: G9151790

NTC 3 K Type: IKF1C 03/200 Type: IKF1C 03/250 Type: IKF1C 03/300 S
Item No.: G9150450 Item No.: G9150580 Item No.: G9151800

NTC 10 K Type: IKF1C 10/200 Type: IKF1C 10/250 Type: IKF1C 10/300 S
Item No.: G9150460 Item No.: G9150590 Item No.: G9151810

NTC 10 K Type: IKF1C 10 PRE/200 Type: IKF1C 10 PRE/250 Type: IKF1C 10 PRE/300 S
Prekon Item No.: G9150470 Item No.: G9150600 Item No.: G9151820

NTC 20 K Type: IKF1C 20/200 Type: IKF1C 20/250 Type: IKF1C 20/300 S
Item No.: G9150480 Item No.: G9150610 Item No.: G9151830

NTC 30 K Type: IKF1C 30/200 Type: IKF1C 30/250 Type: IKF1C 30/300 S
Item No.: G9150490 Item No.: G9150620 Item No.: G9151840

NTC 50 K Type: IKF1C 50/200 Type: IKF1C 50/250 Type: IKF1C 50/300 S
Item No.: G9150500 Item No.: G9150630 Item No.: G9151850

KTY 11/6 Type: IKF1Y 11/6/200 Type: IKF1Y 11/6/250 Type: IKF1Y 11/6/300 S
Item No.: G9150510 Item No.: G9150640 Item No.: G9151860

LM 235 Z Type: IKF1LM/200 Type: IKF1LM/250 Type: IKF1LM/300 S


Item No.: G9150520 Item No.: G9150650 Item No.: G9151870

Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 131


Industrial built-in duct sensor IKF1 (design B)
with passive output

Options PG

Other installation lengths: 50 mm each, max. length 1.000 mm S

3-wire connection S

4-wire connection S

PT-100 class A S

PT-100 1/3 DIN S

PT-100 1/10 DIN S

PT-1000 1/3 DIN S

Temperature-proof up to 260°C S

Temperature-proof up to 400°C (PT 100 / PT 1000 only) S

Temperature-proof up to 600°C (PT 100 / PT 1000 only) S

Accessory

S
Installation flange MF

IKF 1, dimensioned drawing Installation flange MF, dimensioned drawing

IKF1, connection diagram Dip sleeve THMs… / THV…, dimensioned drawing

Catalogue 2007 | Page 132


Industrial built-in duct sensor IKF1M (design B)
with active output (measuring transducer 0 – 10 V or 4 – 20 mA)
Technical data Application
Measuring range: – 50 … + 50°C IKF1M / 1 … For the measuring of temperatures in
0 … + 100°C IKF1M / 2 … liquids and gases that flow in pipes,
other measuring ranges available on conduits, air ducts, reservoirs, tanks or
request containers used in the machine-, ap-
Sensor: PT 100, DIN EN 60751, class B, paratus and plant engineering sphere.
3 conductors The temperature-dependant resistance
of the sensor is, in a temperature-linear
Outputs: 0 … 10 V or 4 … 20 mA manner, being transduced to a current
Electrical connections: 0.14 up to 1.5 mm2 signal of 4 to 20 mA or to a voltage
Operating voltage: 24 V DC signal of 0 to 10 V. The measuring
Ambient temperature: max. + 70°C transducer is delivered tuned to the
following measuring ranges: – 50 …
Dimensioned drawing: aluminium, design B + 50° C or 0 … + 100° C. If provided
Degree of protection: IP 43 for the application in air ducts, the
Sensor tube: V2A 1.4301 / 6 mm Ø use of a special installation flange is
regarding length, see table below required. If provided for use in liquids,
nickel-plated dip sleeves need to be
Dip sleeves: nickel-plated brass or V4A
applied. In aggressive media, the use
for overview / lengths, see page 157
of dip sleeves of stainless steel (V4A) is
Installation flange: page 157 recommended. The dip sleeves or the
installation flange are not included in
the scope of the delivery and need to
ordered seperately as an accessory.

Sensor tube Measuring range: –50 … +50 ˚C Measuring range: 0 … +100 ˚C PG

Output 0 … 10 V Output 4 … 20 mA Output 0 … 10 V Output 4 … 20 mA

65 mm Type: Type: Type: Type: S


(for 50 mm dip IKF1M/1/0-10/50 IKF1M/1/4-20/50 IKF1M/2/0-10/50 IKF1M/2/4-20/50
sleeve) Item: G9150660 Item: G9150670 Item: G9150760 Item: G9150770

115 mm Type: Type: Type: Type: S


(for 100 mm dip IKF1M/1/0-10/100 IKF1M/1/4-20/100 IKF1M/2/0-10/100 IKF1M/2/4-20/100
sleeve) Item: G9150680 Item: G9150690 Item: G9150780 Item: G9150790

165 mm Type: Type: Type: Type: S


(for 150 mm dip IKF1M/1/0-10/150 IKF1M/1/4-20/150 IKF1M/2/0-10/150 IKF1M/2/4-20/150
sleeve) Item: G9150700 Item: G9150710 Item: G9150800 Item: G9150810

215 mm Type: Type: Type: Type: S


(for 200 mm dip IKF1M/1/0-10/200 IKF1M/1/4-20/200 IKF1M/2/0-10/200 IKF1M/2/4-20/200
sleeve) Item: G9150720 Item: G9150730 Item: G9150820 Item: G9150830

265 mm Type: Type: Type: Type: S


(for 250 mm dip IKF1M/1/0-10/250 IKF1M/1/4-20/250 IKF1M/2/0-10/250 IKF1M/2/4-20/250
sleeve) Item: G9150740 Item: G9150750 Item: G9150840 Item: G9150850

315 mm Type: Type: Type: Type: S


(for 300 mm dip IKF1M/1/0-10/300 IKF1M/1/4-20/300 IKF1M/2/0-10/300 IKF1M/2/4-20/300
Sensors

sleeve) Item: G9151880 Item: G9151890 Item: G9151900 Item: G9151910

Options PG

Other installation lengths: 50 mm each, max. 1.000 mm S

Temperature-proof up to 260°C S

Temperature-proof up to 400°C (PT 100 / PT 1000 only) S

Temperature-proof up to 600°C (PT 100 / PT 1000 only) S

Accessory PG

Installation flange MF S

Catalogue 2007 | Page 1


Industrial built-in duct sensor IKF1M (design B)
with active output (measuring transducer 0 – 10 V or 4 – 20 mA)
IKF1M, dimensioned drawing Dip sleeve THMs… / THV…, dimensioned drawing

Installation flange MF, dimensioned drawing IKF1M 0…10 V, connection scheme

IKF1M 4…20 mA, connection scheme

Catalogue 2007 | Page 134


Surface temperature sensor OF
OF … Surface temperature sensor
Technical data Application
Measuring range: – 20 … + 80°C For the detection of temperatures on
smooth and even surfaces, such as glass,
Sensors: see table
window panes, heaters or radiators.
Tolerance classes: PT100/PT1000 DIN EN 60751 B The sensor holder is affixed to the related
NI1000 DIN EN 43760 B surface by means of an adhesive foil.
A pressure spring serves for the required
Cable length: 1 m PVC 2 x 0.14 mm2 (standard) surface contact between the sensor and
Process connection: directly onto the measuring point the measuring point to be controlled.
by means of an adhesive foil
Measurement current: max. 3 mA
Degree of protection: IP 54
Sensor sleeve: plastic
Sensor characteristics: page 162 – 163

Type Item No. Sensor PG

OFP 100 G9110010 PT 100 S


OFP 1000 G9110020 PT 1000 S
OFN 1000 G9110030 NI 1000 S
OFN 1000 TK 5000 G9110040 NI 1000 TK 5000 S
OFC 18 G9110050 NTC 1 K 8 S
OFC 03 G9110060 NTC 3 K S
OFC 10 G9110070 NTC 10 K S
OFC 10 PRE G9110080 NTC 10 K Prekon S
OFC 20 G9110090 NTC 20 K S
OFC 30 G9110100 NTC 30 K S
OFC 50 G9110110 NTC 50 K S
OFY 11/6 G9110120 KTY 11 / 6 S
OFLM G9110130 LM 235 Z S

Optional

2-wire (PVC), per m S


3-wire connection, per m S
3-wire connection (shielded), per m S
4-wire connection, per m S
4-wire connection (shielded), per m S
PT-100 class A S
Sensors

PT-100 1⁄3 DIN S


PT-100 1⁄10 DIN S
PT-1000 1⁄3 DIN S

Dimensioned drawing

Catalogue 2007 | Page 15


Clip-on temperature sensor ALF with passive and active output
ALF … Clip-on temperature sensor
ALFM … Clip-on temperature sensor with measuring transducer 0 – 10 V or 4 – 20 mA

Technical data Application


Measuring range: passive: –30 … + 105°C For the detection of tempe-
active: 0 … 100°C ratures at conduits, pipes or
heaters.
Sensors, passive: see table
Tolerance classes, PT100/PT1000 DIN EN 60751 B The active clip-on sensor model
passive: NI1000 DIN EN 43760 B ALFM transduces, in a tempe-
rature-linear manner, the tempe-
Measurement current, passive: max. 3 mA rature-dependent resistance of
Connector type, passive: 2-wire, 0.14 up to 2.5 mm2 the sensor to a voltage signal of
(standard), max. cable length 50 m 0 to 10 V or to a current signal
of 4 to 20 mA. The measuring
Dimensioned drawing: polyamide 30 %, fibreglass reinforced transducer is delivered tuned to
Colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 the measuring range 0 … 100°C.

Degree of protection: IP 65 To improve the transmission of


the actually sensed tempera-
Fixing: cable straps, 450 mm long, removable,
tures, it is recommended to
temperature-proof up to 105ºC
apply heat conduction paste
Sensor characteristics, passive: page 162 – 163 between the tube or pipe and
Outputs, active: 0 – 10 V or 4 – 20 mA the clip-on sensor.
Connecting cable, active: 0.14 – 1.5 mm2

Type Item No. Sensor PG

ALFP 100 G9050010 PT 100 S


ALFP 1000 G9050020 PT 1000 S
ALFN 1000 G9050030 NI 1000 S
ALFN 1000 TK 5000 G9050040 NI 1000 TK 5000 S
ALFC 18 G9050050 NTC 1 K 8 S
ALFC 03 G9050060 NTC 3 K S
ALFC 10 G9050070 NTC 10 K S
ALFC 10 PRE G9050080 NTC 10 K Prekon S
ALFC 20 G9050090 NTC 20 K S
ALFC 30 G9050100 NTC 30 K S
ALFC 50 G9050110 NTC 50 K S
ALFY 11/6 G9050120 KTY 11 / 6 S
ALFLM G9050130 LM 235 Z S
ALF-0 G9050270 “0” (NTC 2K 25) S
ALF-2 G9050160 “2” (NTC 47K) S
ALF-3 G9050180 “3” (NTC 8K) S
ALF-4 G9050190 “4” (NTC 10K) S
ALF-5 G9050200 “5” (NTC 50K) S
ALF-51 G9050210 “51” (PTC 1K) S

Options PG

3-wire connection S
4-wire connection S

Clip-on temperature sensor, active Item No. Output Measuring range PG


ALFM / 0 –10 G9050140 0–10 V 0…100°C S

ALFM / 4 –20 G9050150 4–20 mA 0…100°C S


Other measuring ranges S

Accessory PG

Heat conduction paste (2 ml), WP-01, G9990180, see page 160 S

Catalogue 2007 | Page 16


Clip-on temperature sensor ALF with passive and active output
ALF … Clip-on temperature sensor
ALFM … Clip-on temperature sensor with measuring transducer 0 – 10 V or 4 – 20 mA
Dimensioned drawing Sensor connection

Connection scheme 0-10 V Connection scheme 4-20 mA

Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 137


Differential pressure measuring transducer DF

DF… Technical data Application


Measuring principle: inductive For the supervision
of filters and the
Overload capacity: 5fold, max. system pressure with ∆ p measure-
measuring of filling
ments 1 bar, higher overload factors possible on
levels in the ventilation-,
request
air conditioning and
Medium: non-aggressive types of gas clean room engineering
sphere.
Parts in contact with Ni, Al, CuBe, Pu Also suited for the
measuring medium: measuring of over- and
Accuracy / linearity: ± 1 % of final value negative pressures as
well as of differential
Option: ± 0.5 % and ± 0.2 % of final value pressures that occur in
Hysteresis: ± 0.1 % max. of final value non-aggressive gasi-
form types of media.
Auxiliary energy: 15 … 30 V =
Flow of auxiliary energy: ≤ 0,05 % For conversion of
pressures, see table on
Output signal: 0 … 10 V, (working resistance 2 K) page 141.
Current consumption: approx. 10 mA, without load
Onset temperature: T90 approx. 0,02 sec.
DF…D (display)
Temperature drift values: zero ± 0.3 % of final value/10 K max.
margin ± 0.3 % of final value/10 K max.
Temperature range: specific range: 10 … 50°C
Storage temperature: – 10 … + 70°C
Long-term stability: ± 0.5 % per year / type
Pressure connections: Ø 6.5 x 11 (for flexible hoses, Ø 6 mm)
Electrical connection: screwed cable gland M12 x 1.5, screw terminals
Degree of protection: IP 65
Protection class: 0
Sensor volume: approx. 3 ml
Increase in volume: approx. 0.2 ml at nominal pressure
Colour: grey (upper part RAL 7016,
bottom part RAL 7035)

Type Item No. Power supply Measuring range Output PG

DF 50 UGT 3 G8000275 15 … 30 V = 0 … 50 Pa 0 … 10 V J

DF 100 UGT 3 G8000276 15 … 30 V = 0 … 100 Pa 0 … 10 V J

DF 300 UGT 3 G8000277 15 … 30 V = 0 … 300 Pa 0 … 10 V J

DF 500 UGT 3 G8000278 15 … 30 V = 0 … 500 Pa 0 … 10 V J

DF 1000 UGT 3 G8000279 15 … 30 V = 0 … 1.000 Pa 0 … 10 V J

DF 2000 UGT 3 G8000283 15 … 30 V = 0 … 2.000 Pa 0 … 10 V J

DF 3000 UGT 3 G8000280 15 … 30 V = 0 … 3.000 Pa 0 … 10 V J

DF 7000 UGT 3 G8000281 15 … 30 V = 0 … 7.000 Pa 0 … 10 V J

Accessory

Type Item No. PG

JZ-06/1 H5309229 Connection set including plastic conduit connections, 2 x 90° elbows, 2 extension pieces K
(90 mm), 4 self-tapping screws, 2 m hose (outside Ø 6 mm).

Catalogue 2007 | Page 18


Differential measuring transducer DF

Options PG

Current output: 4 … 20 mA (I) J

Voltage outlet: ± 5 V, ± 10 V J

Auxiliary energy: 24 V~, 110 V~, 230 V~ J

Auxiliary energy: 24 V = (with galvanic isolation) J

Linearity: ± 0.5 % (as of a measuring range of 0…100 Pa) J

Linearity: ± 0.2 % (as of a measuring range of 0…300 Pa) J

Output signal: Root extracted output signal (three conductors) J

LCD display: 3 ½ digit J

Overload capacity: 10fold J

Connection diagram
DF 300 UGT 3 D - D = display (four conductors / three conductors)

GT 1 = supply voltage 230 V~


GT 2 = supply voltage 24 V~
GT 3 = supply voltage 15…30 V=

U = output signal 0…10 V 100 Pa =


1 mbar
I = output signal 4…20 mA

Range in Pa: 0…50,…100, …300, …500


…1000, …2000, …3000, …7000

Dimensioned drawing JZ-06/1

Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 19


Pressure measuring transducer MUD
MUD … Transducer for the measuring of pressures in liquid and gasiform media (0 - 10 V or 4 – 20 mA)
Technical data Application
Measuring principle: thin-film, piezoresistive For the measuring of pressures that
occur in non-aggressive gasiform or
Measuring range: 160 mbar, 2.5/6/10/25/60 bar
liquid media used in the hydraulic-,
Temperature of medium / – 40 … + 100°C pneumatic-, machine-, plant engi-
ambient temperature: neering and/or process technology
sphere.
Output: 0 –10 V or 4–20 mA
Supply voltage: 12 … 32 V = at 4 … 20 mA The stainless steel membrane is
14 … 30 V = at 0 … 10 V absolutely vacuum-tight.

Electrical connection: via DIN 46344 compliant connector


Pressure connection: G ¼”, with G½” adapter
Linearity error: +/– 0.5 % above measuring range
Total error: +/– 1.5 % (– 10 … + 90°C)
Degree of protection: IP 65
Overpressure: 2fold of the measuring range

Pressure measuring transducer 0–160 mbar

Type Item No. Measuring range Output PG

MUD / 0 –10 / 0,16 G9240010 0–160 mbar 0–10 V S

MUD / 4–20 / 0,16 G9240020 0–160 mbar 4–20 mA S

Pressure measuring transducer 0–2.5 bar

Type Item No. Measuring range Output PG

MUD / 0–10 / 2.5 G9240030 0–2.5 bar 0–10 V S

MUD / 4–20 / 2.5 G9240040 0–2.5 bar 4–20 mA S

Pressure measuring transducer 0–6 bar

Type Item No. Measuring range Output PG

MUD / 0–10 / 6 G9240050 0–6 bar 0–10 V S

MUD / 4–20 / 6 G9240060 0–6 bar 4–20 mA S

Pressure measuring transducer 0–10 bar

Type Item No. Measuring range Output PG

MUD / 0–10 / 10 G9240070 0–10 bar 0–10 V S

MUD / 4–20 / 10 G9240080 0–10 bar 4–20 mA S

Catalogue 2007 | Page 10


Pressure measuring transducer MUD
MUD … Transducer for the measuring of pressures in liquid and gasiform media (0 – 10 V or 4 – 20 mA)

Pressure measuring transducer 0–25 bar

Type Item No. Measuring range Output PG

MUD / 0–10 / 25 G9240090 0–25 bar 0–10 V S

MUD / 4–20 / 25 G9240100 0–25 bar 4–20 mA S

Pressure measuring transducer 0–60 bar

Type Item No. Measuring range Output PG

MUD / 0–10 / 60 G9240110 0–60 bar 0–10 V S

MUD / 4–20 / 60 G9240120 0–60 bar 4–20 mA S

Accessory
MUD-A 1⁄2”, adapter G 1⁄2” G9990190 S

Optional
Other measuring ranges (available on request): 0–16 bar, 0–40 bar, 0–100 bar, 0–400 bar

Pressure conversion table

Pa kPa bar mbar mWs

1 Pa = 1 0.001 0.00001 0.01 0.000101971

1 kPa = 1.000 1 0.01 10 0.101971

1 bar = 100,000 100 1 1.000 10.1971

1 mbar = 100 0.1 0.001 1 0.0101971

1 mWs = 9,806.65 9.806.65 0.0980665 98.0665 1

Dimensioned drawing Adapter for MUD

Sensors

Wiring diagram 0-10 V Wiring diagram 4–20 mA

Catalogue 2007 | Page 141


Airflow measuring transducer FS

Technical data Application


FS-K3
Flow measuring range: 0 … 10m/s can be selected by For the detection of air velo-
0 … 15m/s means of an internal cities and the commutation of
0 … 20m/s plug-in bridge these measurable variables to
an electric standard signal
within the range from 0 to 10 V
Overload capacity: up to 30m/s
or 4 to 20 mA. Specially suited
Output signal: 0 … 10 V for the application as duct
Can be selected by means of an < 1.0 mA (linear, 3-wire technique), sensor in the refrigeration-, air
internal plug-in bridge 4 … 20 mA, RI < 500 Ω conditioning-, ventilation engi-
neering and process technology
Measuring principle: hot film anemometer sphere.
Operating principle: The air flow acts in a cooling manner on
a heated sensor housed in a sensor tube.
The stronger the air flow, the higher the
cooling effect on the sensor. A second
sensing element serves to compensate
the effect of the air temperature.
Flow measuring accuracy measuring range 0 … 10m/s:
at 20°C, 45 % r.h.,1013 hPA: ± (0.3 m/s + 3 % of measured value)
measuring range 0 … 15 m/s:
FS-3 ± (0.3 m/s + 3 % of measured value)
measuring range 0 … 20 m/s:
± (0.3m/s + 4 % of measured value)
Power supply: 24 V~/ = ± 10 %, max. 150 mA
Reaction time t90 at 10 m/s: typical: 2 sec or 0.2 sec
Anisotropy at 10 m/s: < 3 % of measured value at ∆ α < 10°
Connection: screw terminals (up to 1.5 mm2)
Electromagnetic compatibi- EN 50081-1
lity in compliance with: EN 50082-2
Housing material: ABS
Degree of protection: IP 65 (standard)
Temperature range: operation: – 10 … + 50°C
Storage temperature: –30 … + 60°C
Colour: grey (upper part RAL 7016, bottom part
RAL 7035)

Type Item No. Equipment Output PG

FS-K3 G8000297 Duct sensor for the sensing of flows 0 … 10 V or 4 … 20 mA J


(sensor length 200 mm)

FS-3 G8000298 Duct sensor for the sensing of flows 0 … 10 V or 4 … 20 mA J


incl. remote sensor and 1 m long
cable (sensor length 150 mm)

FS-K3 Dimensioned drawing FS-3 Dimensioned drawing FS-K3, connection diagram

Catalogue 2007 | Page 12


Indoor motion sensor RBS and outdoor motion sensor ABS
RBS … Indoor motion sensor with switching output
ABS … Outdoor motion sensor with switching output
RBS Technical data Application
Sensor: passive infrared sensor The indoor motion sensor RBS
Sensing coverage: 360º (presence detector) recognizes the
the presence of persons in office
Detection distance: max. 10 m
rooms, living spaces and business
Supply voltage: 24 V~/= rooms and enables to detect motions
Housing: RBS: plastic going on there. It serves for the
ABS: polyamide 30% supervision of conditions and the
fibreglass reinforced time-dependent control of room-rela-
Colour: alpine white, similar to RAL 9010 ted indoor functions. A potential-free
relay contact switches upon the
Output: relay, max. 230 V~ 2 A, potential-free
transgression of a certain threshold
Conductor cross section: 0.14 up to 1.5 mm2 value that can be adjusted by means
ABS Tracking time: 0…16 min., adjustable of a potentiometer. The related swit-
Mounting / installation: RBS: on surface or on an UP box ching state is indicated by an LED.
ABS: on surface
The outdoor motion sensor ABS
Degree of protection: RBS: IP 30
(presence detector) recognizes the
ABS: IP 54
presence of persons and motions
Dimensions: RBS: 74 x 74 x 23 mm in outdoor areas, in industrial halls
ABS: 58 x 64 x 34 mm or greenhouses. It serves for the
supervision of conditions and motion-
dependent control of lighting instal-
lations, heating- or alarm systems. A
potential-free relay contact switches
upon the transgression of a certain
threshold value that can be adjusted
by means of a potentiometer.

Type Item No. Output PG

RBS G9190010 relay S


ABS G9200010 relay S

RBS, dimensioned drawing ABS, dimensioned drawing

RBS/ABS, connection diagram


Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 1


Room air quality sensor RLS / Duct air quality sensor KLS
Air quality sensor with measuring transducer 0 – 10 V and 4 – 20 mA
or with switching output and measuring transducer 0 – 10 V and 4 – 20 mA
RLS Technical data Application
Sensor: wideband mixed gas sensor The room air quality sensor serves
Supply voltage: 24 V~/= +/–10 %, approx. 80 mA for the requirement-dependant
ventilation of living spaces, office
Ambient temperature: 0 … +50°C
premises, meeting rooms, hotels or
Storage temperature: –20 … +50°C restaurants. It serves for the quan-
Output: measuring transducer titative evaluation of the pollution of
0 – 10 V and 4 – 20 mA or the air in rooms with gases, such as
potential-free relay contact for safety used up breathing air, tobacco some,
extra low voltage (SELV) * solvent vapours, cleaning agents
and measuring transducer 0 – 10 V and car fumes. The room air sensed
and 4 – 20 mA by the sensor is being transduced
to an output signal of 0 – 10 V or
Conductor cross section: 0.14 up to 1.5 mm2
4 – 20 mA. A minimal value at the
Housing: plastic output is interpreted as clean air,
KLS Colour: RLS: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 while a maximum value is valuated
KLS: light grey as strongly polluted air. The version
Mounting / installation: RLS: flush or on an UP box with additional switching output has
KLS: inside of a duct been preset ex factory to a value that
corresponds to 70 % of the maxi-
Degree of protection: RLS: IP 30 mum output value. This value can be
KLS: IP 65 adapted internally to the individually
Protection class: III prevailing room occupancy and/or
Dimensions: RLS: 83 x 78 x 25 mm utilisation conditions.
KLS: 65 x 58 x 35 mm
This air quality sensor is not suited
Running-in time: approx. 1 hour for the execution of a selective CO2
measurement.

Important:
The air quality sensor must not
be used for any safety-relevant appli-
cations, no matter of what kind.

Type Item No. Output PG

RLS G9220010 0 – 10 V, 4 – 20 mA S

RLS/R G9220020 0 – 10 V, 4 – 20 mA, relay* S

KLS G9230040 0 – 10 V, 4 – 20 mA S

KLS/R G9230050 0 – 10 V, 4 – 20 mA, relay* S

* Relay contact suited only for the switching of safety extra low voltage (SELV), max. 30 V AC, 120 V DC 1 (0.2) A.

RLS dimensioned drawing KLS dimensioned drawing

Catalogue 2007 | Page 1


Room air quality sensor RLS and duct air quality sensor KLS
Air quality sensor with measuring transducer 0 – 10 V and 4 – 20 mA
or with switching output and measuring transducer 0 – 10 V and 4 – 20 mA
RLS 0–10/4–10, connection scheme KLS 0–10/4–20, connection scheme

RLS 0–10/4–20 / relay, connection scheme KLS 0–10/4–20 / relay, connection scheme

Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 145


Brightness sensor RHS (indoor) and AHS (outdoor)
RHS Indoor brightness sensor with active output 0 – 10 V
AHS Outdoor brightness sensor with active output 0 – 10 V
RHS Technical data Application
Measuring range: 0…20 klx,0 … 50 klx, 0 … 100 klx The indoor brightness sensor RHS
other measuring ranges available on serves for the control of lighting
request installations, awnings or blinds and
Supply voltage: 24 V~/= ±10 % for daylight-dependent constant
light control purposes. The device is
Housing: RHS: plastic
specially suited for the supervision of
AHS: polyamide 30 % fibreglass
the light conditions at workplaces, in
reinforced
living spaces, business premises and
Colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010 offices.
AHS
Output: measuring transducer 0 – 10 V
Conductor cross section: 0.14 up to 1.5 mm2 The outdoor brightness sensor
AHS serves for the control of lighting
Mounting / installation: RHS: on surface or on UP box
installations, awnings or blinds and
AHS: on surface
for daylight-dependent constant
Degree of protection: RHS: IP 30 light control purposes. The device is
AHS: IP 54 specially suited for the supervision
Dimensions: RHS: 74 x 74 x 23 mm of the light conditions in the exterior,
AHS: 58 x 64 x 34 mm in greenhouses, industry halls or
Range of application: AHS: -20°C...+70°C storage depots.

Type Item No. Output Measuring range PG

RHS/0–10 G9170010 0 – 10 V 0 … 20klx S


AHS/0–10 G9180010 0 – 10 V 0 … 20klx S
AHS/0–10/50 G9180030 0 – 10 V 0 … 50klx S
AHS/0–10/100 G9180040 0 – 10 V 0 … 100klx S

RHS, dimensioned drawing AHS, dimensioned drawing

RHS, connection diagram AHS connection diagram

Catalogue 2007 | Page 16


Temperature and humidity measuring transducer AFT / ATFT
for use in outdoor areas
ATFT Temperature / humidity measuring transformer, 0 – 10 V and 4 – 20 mA
AFT Humidity measuring transformer, 0 – 10 V and 4 – 20 mA, with passive temperature sensor
Technical data Application
Operating voltage: 0 – 10 V 15 … 35 V = / ~ Specially suited for applications in
4 – 20 mA 15 … 35 V = / ~ the building automation-, refrigerati-
Measuring range (humidity): 10 … 90 % r. H. on-, air conditioning and ventilating
engineering or clean room techno-
Humidity related accuracy +/- 3.5 % r. H.
logy sphere or for applications in
(at 20°C):
greenhouses, medical spaces or for
Temperature effect at 45 % r.h. –0.09 % r. H./K meteorological purposes.
Temperature measuring range: 0 … + 50°C
Temperature related +/- 0.5°C
accuracy (at 20°C):
Output signal equivalent to: 0 – 10 V or 4 – 20 mA
0 … 100 % r.h. 0 … + 50°C: selectable via jumper
Ambient temperature: – 5 … + 55°C
Storage temperature: –25…+60°C
Electromagnetic compatibility: EN50081-1 and EN50082-1
Connection: screw terminals (up to 1.5 mm2)
Degree of protection: IP 65
Housing colour: pure white, similar to RAL 9010

Type Item No. Equipment PG

ATFT G9260410 Temperature/humidity 0 –10 V/4 –20 mA S


AFT/P100 G9260510 Humidity 0 –10 V/4 –20 mA, temperature sensor PT100 S
AFT/P1000 G9260610 Humidity 0 –10 V/4 –20 mA, temperature sensor PT1000 S
AFT/NI1000 G9260710 Humidity 0 –10 V/4 –20 mA, temperature sensor NI1000 S

Option
Temperature measuring range -20...+80°C available too (applies to ATFT)
Other temperature sensor types too available for models AFT...
Also available as duct version

0 – 10V / 4 – 20 mA, connection diagram Dimensioned drawing

Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 17


Temperature and humidity measuring transducer TF / FF / FTF
Room and duct version
FTF-R Technical data Room … Duct … Application
Humidity sensor: HC 1000 HC 200 For the detection of tem-
Measuring range 10 … 90 % r.h. 20 … 95 % r.h. peratures (type TF), of the
(humidity): relative humidity (type FF)
or of both temperature and
Humidity related Voltage version: ± 3 % r.h. (40 … 60 %)
relative humidity (type FTF)
accuracy (at 20°C) ± 3 % r.h.
and the conversion of the
Current version: ± 5 % within the remaining
data actually sensed into an
± 3 % r.h. (40 … 60 %) ± 5 % measuring range
electric variable (standard
r.h. (10 … 90 %)
signal 0 … 10 V / 4 ... 20
Temperature effect typical: – 0.05 % r.h./°C typical: – 0.05 % r.h./°C mA).
at 45 % r.h.:
Temperature sensor: PT1000 (tolerance PT1000 (tolerance class B Specially suited for use
class B acc. to DIN 60751) acc. to DIN 60751) as room or duct sensor
Measuring range within the refrigeration-, air
(temperature): 0 … 50°C 0 … 50°C conditioning and ventilation
engineering or the process
Temperature related Voltage version: ± 0.5°C
technology sphere.
accuracy (at 20°C): ± 0.5°C
FTF-K Output signal Current version: ± 0.8°C
equivalent to Signal: 0 … 10 V < 1 mA Signal: 0 … 10 V < 1 mA
0 … 100 r. H., Supply voltage: Supply voltage:
0 … 50°C: 15 … 35 V = 24 V~ ± 20 % 15 … 35 V = 24 V~ ± 20 %
(50/60 Hz) (50/60 Hz)
Supply current: Supply current:
10 mA, 20 mA 10 mA, 20 mA
Signal: 4 … 20 mA Signal: 4 … 20 mA
Supply voltage: Supply voltage:
20 … 28 V = für RL < 500 Ω 20 … 35 V = für RL < 500 Ω
11 … 28 V = für RL < 50 Ω 11 … 35 V = für RL < 50 Ω
Electromagnetic corresponds to corresponds to
compatibility: EN 50081-1, EN 50082-1 EN 50081-1, EN 50082-1
and and EN 55104
EN 55104
Temperature range: operation: – 5 … +50°C, operation: – 5 … + 50°C,
storage: – 25 … +60°C storage: – 25 … + 60°C
Connection: screw terminals (up to 1.5 screw terminals (up to
mm2) 1.5 mm2)
Sensor protection: – sintered bronze filter
Housing: plastic (ABS)/IP 30 plastic (ABS)/IP 65
Colour: pure white, similar to RAL grey (bottom part RAL
9010 7016, upper part RAL
7035)

Index: T = Temperature R = Room installation


F = Humidity K = Duct installation
FT = Humidity / temperature 1 = 0 … 10 V
2 = 4 … 20 mA
e.g. F = sensor → FTF = Humidity / temperature sensor

Type Item No. Equipment Output PG

FF-R 2 G8000260 Humidity room sensor 4 … 20 mA J

TF-R 2 G8000261 Temperature room sensor 4 … 20 mA J

FTF-R 2 G8000262 Humidity / temperature room sensor 4 … 20 mA J

FF-R 1 G8000263 Humidity room sensor 0 … 10 V J

TF-R 1 G8000264 Temperature room sensor 0 … 10 V J

FTF-R 1 G8000265 Humidity / temperature room sensor 0 … 10 V J

FF-K 2 G8000266 Humidity duct sensor 4 … 20 mA J

TF-K 2 G8000267 Temperature duct sensor 4 … 20 mA J

FTF-K 2 G8000268 Humidity / temperature duct sensor 4 … 20 mA J

Catalogue 2007 | Page 18


Temperature and humidity measuring transducer TF / FF / FTF
Room and duct version

Type Item No. Equipment Output PG

FF-K1 G8000269 Humidity duct sensor 0 … 10 V J

TF-K1 G8000270 Temperature duct sensor 0 … 10 V J

FTF-K1 G8000271 Humidity/temperature duct sensor 0 … 10 V J

Accessory

As for wall bracket JZ-20-1, see pages 159 – 160 K

FTF-R FTF-K

FF-K1, FF-R1 FTF-K1, FTF-R1 TF-K1, TF-R1

FF-K2, FF-R2 FTF-K2, FTF-R2 TF-K2, TF-R2

Sensors

Catalogue 2007 | Page 149


Temperature and humidity measuring transducers
TF / FF / FTF / ATFT / AFT
Outdoor-, room- and duct versions

The tables hereafter provide an overview of the coherencies between the relative air moisture and the voltage/current or temperature
(applies to types TF, FF, FTF, ATFT, AFT)

Relative humidity
% V mA
0 0 4
5 0.5 4.8
10 1 5.6
15 1.5 6.4
20 2 7.2
25 2.5 8
30 3 8.8
35 3.5 9.6
40 4 10.4
45 4.5 11.2
50 5 12
55 5.5 12.8
60 6 13.6
65 6.5 14.4
70 7 15.2
75 7.5 16
80 8 16.8
85 8.5 17.6
90 9 18.4
95 9.5 19.2
100 10 20

Temperature
°C V mA
0 0 4.0
5 1 5.6
10 2 7.2
15 3 8.8
20 4 10.4
25 5 12.0
30 6 13.6
35 7 15.2
40 8 16.8
45 9 18.4
50 10 20.0

Catalogue 2007 | Page 150


Miscellaneous

Miscellaneous
+ I
2 @
Miscellaneous, overview:
Accessories
Accessories / options / special solutions Page 154 – Page 160

Technical annex / type comparison old / new


Type comparison old / new Page 161

Sensor characteristics Page 162 – Page 163

Technical terms Page 164 – Page 165

Useful hints for electrical and heating device fitters Page 166

Table of contents
Table of contents ordered by product names Page 167 – Page 169

Table of contents ordered by type designation codes Page 170 – Page 172

General / Contact / Adresses


Certificate Page 173

General terms of delivery Page 174

Safety regulations Page 174

Information on technical data Page 174

Addresses and contacts Page 175


Miscellaneous

Catalogue 2007 | Page 153


Dip sleeve / protective spiral for KR/LR 80/85
and for sleeve- and air sensors
For applications in the industrial and heating technology field
THK / NTHK SW-200 / SW-200-12

Type Item No. Length Diameter Material max. pressure PG


(P/bar)

Dip sleeves for KR 80 / 85


THK-100 C1809043 100 mm 8 x 10 mm Nickel-plated brass 20 K
THK-120 C1809031 120 mm 8 x 10 mm Nickel-plated brass 20 K
THK-200 C1809070 200 mm 8 x 10 mm Nickel-plated brass 20 K
THK-280 C1809106 280 mm 8 x 10 mm Nickel-plated brass 20 K
THK-600 C1809132 600 mm 8 x 10 mm Nickel-plated brass 20 K
NTHK-100 C1809056 100 mm 8 x 10 mm V4 A (1.4571) 40 K
NTHK-120 C1809005 120 mm 8 x 10 mm V4 A (1.4571) 40 K
NTHK-200 C1809082 200 mm 8 x 10 mm V4 A (1.4571) 40 K
NTHK-280 C1809118 280 mm 8 x 10 mm V4 A (1.4571) 40 K
THK-100 x 17 C1809157 100 mm 15 x 17 mm Nickel-plated brass 20 K
THK-200 x 17 C1809183 200 mm 15 x 17 mm Nickel-plated brass 20 K
NTHK-100 x 17 C1809169 100 mm 15 x 17 mm V4 A (1.4571) 40 K
NTHK-200 x 17 C1809195 200 mm 15 x 17 mm V4 A (1.4571) 40 K

Type Item No. Length Diameter Material PG

Protective spiral for LR 80 ...


SWK 100 C1809200 100 mm 11 x 17 mm Nickel-plated steel K
SWK 120 C1809207 120 mm 11 x 17 mm Nickel-plated steel K
SWK 200 C1809498 200 mm 11 x 17 mm Nickel-plated steel K
SWK 280 C1809221 280 mm 11 x 17 mm Nickel-plated steel K

Type Item No. Length Ø screwed connection Ø Spiral Material PG

Protective spiral for the fixing of capillaries in air ducts (JET / JMT / JTF / WR 81) and for the installation of all HF sleeve- and
LF air sensors
SW-200 C1809219 200 mm 8 mm 11 x 17 mm Nickel-plated steel K
SW-200-12 C1809220 200 mm 12 mm 11 x 17 mm Nickel-plated steel K

Catalogue 2007 | Page 15


Dip sleeves and protective spiral for KR/LR 80/85
and sleeve- and air sensors
For applications in the industrial and heating technology field

THK/NTHK SWK

SW-200 SW-200-12

Miscellaneous

Catalogue 2007 | Page 155


Dip sleeves for capillary- and frost protection thermostats and for HF
sleeve sensors / for the installation into the floor pavement
for JET / JMT / WR 81 and Ø 7 mm HF sleeve sensors and for JTF (use type TH/NTH-140 with JTF only)
for HF Ø 8 mm sleeve sensor for the installation into the floor pavement
For applications in the industrial and heating technology field

TH / NTH THF

Type Item No. Length Diameter Material max. pressure PG


(P/bar)

For Ø 7 mm HF sleeve sensors and capillary and frost protection thermostats JET / JMT/WR 81 and JTF
(use type TH / NTH-140 with JTF only)
TH-55 C1809296 55 mm 8 x 10 mm Nickel-plated brass 20 K
TH-100 C1809310 100 mm 8 x 10 mm Nickel-plated brass 20 K
TH-140* C1809409 140 mm 10 x 12 mm Nickel-plated brass 20 K
TH-200 C1809438 200 mm 8 x 10 mm Nickel-plated brass 20 K
TH-280 C1809440 280 mm 8 x 10 mm Nickel-plated brass 20 K
NTH-100 C1809308 100 mm 8 x 10 mm V4 A (1.4571) 40 K
NTH-140* C1809435 140 mm 10 x 12 mm V4 A (1.4571) 40 K
NTH-200 C1809439 200 mm 8 x 10 mm V4 A (1.4571) 40 K
NTH-280 C1809441 280 mm 8 x 10 mm V4 A (1.4571) 40 K
* suited for all types with an X in the type designation code, e.g. JET-1… X or JMT 202 X

Protective copper sleeve for sleeve sensor HF (Ø 7.7 up to 8.9 mm) for the installation into the pavement

THF C1809515 K

TH / NTH THF

Catalogue 2007 | Page 156


Dip sleeves and installation flange for HF / EKF / IKF and MWF
for Ø 6 mm sleeve sensors (PVC and silicone) and built-in duct-, industrial duct- and average
value sensors

Sensor equipment

THMs THV THVH MF

Type Item No. Installation Diameter max. pressure PG


length (P/bar)

Dip sleeves of nickel-plated brass with insertion, also suitable for use with empty enclosures of the KR series
THMs/50 G9990010 50 mm 7 x 10 mm 20 S
THMs/100 G9990020 100 mm 7 x 10 mm 20 S
THMs/150 G9990030 150 mm 7 x 10 mm 20 S
THMs/200 G9990040 200 mm 7 x 10 mm 20 S
THMs/250 G9990050 250 mm 7 x 10 mm 20 S
Stainless steel dip sleeves (V4 A 1.4571)
THV/50 G9990060 50 mm 6.3 x 9 mm 40 S
THV/100 G9990070 100 mm 6.3 x 9 mm 40 S
THV/150 G9990080 150 mm 6.3 x 9 mm 40 S
THV/200 G9990090 200 mm 6.3 x 9 mm 40 S
THV/250 G9990100 250 mm 6.3 x 9 mm 40 S
THV/300 G9990200 300 mm 6.3 x 9 mm 40 S
Other lengths possible in steps of 50 mm. (max. length: 1,000 mm) S
Stainless steel dip sleeves (V4 A 1.4571) with 80 mm neck pipe
THVH/50 G9990110 50 mm 6.3 x 9 mm 40 S
THVH/100 G9990120 100 mm 6.3 x 9 mm 40 S
THVH/150 G9990130 150 mm 6.3 x 9 mm 40 S
THVH/200 G9990140 200 mm 6.3 x 9 mm 40 S
THVH/250 G9990150 250 mm 6.3 x 9 mm 40 S
Other lengths possible in steps of 50 mm (max. length 1,000 mm) S
Aluminium installation flange
MF G9990160 40 x 6 mm S
Miscellaneous

Catalogue 2007 | Page 157


Accessories for heating technology and sensor applications /
special painting / imprinting

Type Item No. Dimensions PG

Protector 01 (ball- / sun- / rain protection), stainless steel V4A 1.4571


Protector 01 G9990170 150 x 90 x 47 mm S

Cover frame
Frame UN990002 S

Empty enclosure with 2-pole terminal


KR 80.1 C1801645 S

Adapter G½˝ for pressure measuring transducer MUD


MUD-A ½ G9990190 Adaptation from ¼ to ½ Inch S

Special painting

Minimum ordering volume: 100 pieces

Special printing

One-time printing cliché costs

As of 20 pieces

As of 50 pieces

As of 100 pieces

As of 500 pieces

Catalogue 2007 | Page 158


Accessories for industrial and sensor applications in the heating
and climate technology field

JZ-04 JZ-05/06K JZ-05/6M

JZ-06/1 JZ-07 JZ-08

JZ-09 JZ-10 JZ-20-1

FS-HI PAP 01 JZ-17

JZ-18
Miscellaneous

Catalogue 2007 | Page 159


Accessories for heating technology / air conditioning technology /
industrial technology and sensors

Type Item No. max. pressure PG

JZ-04 E6160133 Capillary tube feedthrough for air duct installation purposes including 30 cm K
protective hose (for use with frost protection thermostats JTF and capillary
controllers JMT, WR, JET)
JZ-05 / 06 K C1809536 1 set of installation clips for frost protection thermostat JTF (6 pieces) K
made of plastic (max. 145°C)
JZ-05 / 6 M C1809474 1 set of installation clips for frost protection thermostat JTF (6 pieces) K
made of metal
JZ-06 / 1 H5309229 Set with plastic duct connections (angle, 2 x 90°, 2 extensions (90 mm), K
4 self-tapping screws, 2 m hose (outside diameter 6 mm) for differential
pressure switches JDW and JDL and pressure measuring transducer DF
JZ-07 E6160145 Installation bracket for frost protection thermostat JTF K
JZ-08 E6150031 Spare tag for air flow sensing relay JSL K
JZ-09 E6140170 Spare paddle (4 pieces) for flow monitor JSF (sizes form 1”... 8”) K
JZ-10 H5309237 Installation bracket for JDL 109 /-113 and JDW-3/-5 /-10 incl. 6 screws K
JZ-14 JA990001 Sealing set for frost protection thermostats JTF-1 … -25 K
JZ-17 MN990001 Adapter plate for Berlin 3000 design housing (hardwired) K
JZ-18 MN990002 Snap-on adapter plate for Berlin 3000 design housing K
(radio controller can be removed)
JZ-20-1 E6130144 Wall bracket for duct hygrostat HI, for duct measuring transducers TF, FF, FTF, K
FS-K3 and air flow monitor JSL-20 K
FS-HI H530975 Sensor protection for duct hygrostat HI K
PAP 01-14 A201201 Adapter plate for Pikolo design housing (PTR 01, PETA, PETR, PHY, PTF, RF) K
WP-01 G9990180 Heat conduction paste (2 ml) K
ATRS-1 C1809518 Temperature fixing set ATR 83.0 ... K

Catalogue 2007 | Page 160


Type comparison old / new (JAT, JET and JRT)

Old Control Switching New Control Switching


alre-types range difference alre-types range difference
JAT-1; JAT-6 – 15 … + 30°C 2–20 K JAT-110 * –35 … +30°C 2 – 20 K
JAT-1F; JAT-6F – 15 … + 30°C 2–20 K JAT-110F –35 … +30°C 2 – 20 K
JAT-112 * –35 … +30°C FT
JAT-120 * 0 …  60°C 2 – 20 K
JAT-120F 0 …  60°C 2 – 20 K
JAT-2N; JAT-7N 20 … 80°C 2–20 K JAT-130 * 40 … 100°C 2 – 20 K
JAT-2NF; JAT-7NF 20 … 80°C 2–20 K JAT-130F 40 … 100°C 2 – 20 K
JAT-3; JAT-5N 50 … 120°C 3–16 K dropped alternative: WR81.117-5
JAT-5NF 50 … 120°C 3–16 K dropped alternative: WR81.117-5
JAT-8 50 … 120°C ST dropped
JAT-4 100 … 200°C 9–50 K dropped

JET-4X; JRT-8X; –35 … +30°C 2–20 K


JET-5X; JRT-5X –35 … +30°C 1 K, fixed JET-110X –35 … +30°C 2 – 20 K
JRT-8X(N) –35 … +30°C 2–20 K dropped
JET-4XG; JRT-5XG –35 … +30°C 2–20 K dropped
JET-4XF; JRT-8XF; –35 … +30°C 2–20 K
JET-5XF; JRT-5XF –35 … +30°C 1 K, fixed JET-110XF –35 … +30°C 2 – 20 K
JET-5XFG; JRT-5XFG –35 … +30°C 1 K, fixed JET-110XFG –35 … +30°C 2 – 20 K
JRT-7X –35 … +30°C FT JET-112X –35 … +30°C FT
JRT-7XG –35 … +30°C FT dropped
JRT-7XF –35 … +30°C FT JET-112XF –35 … +30°C FT
JET-7X; JRT-11X; 0 …  60°C 2–20 K
JET-8X; JRT-9X 0 …  60°C 1 K, fixed JET-120X 0 …  60°C 2 – 20 K
JET-7XG; JRT-11XG 0 …  60°C 2–20 K JET-120XG 0 …  60°C 2 – 20 K
JET-7XF; JRT-11XF; 0 …  60°C 2–20 K
JET-8XF; JRT-9XF 0 …  60°C 1 K, fixed JET-120XF 0 …  60°C 2 – 20 K
JET-7XFG; JRT-9XG 0 …  60°C div. JET-120XFG * 0 …  60°C 2 – 20 K
JET-16XN; 40 … 100°C 2–20 K
JET-17XN; JRT-14XN 40 … 100°C 1 K, fixed JET-130X 40 … 100°C 2 – 20 K
JET-16XNG; JRT-14XG 40 … 100°C div. JET-130XG 40 … 100°C 2 – 20 K
JET-16XNF; 40 … 100°C 2–20 K
JET-17XNF; JRT-14XNF 40 … 100°C 1 K, fixed JET-130XF 40 … 100°C 2 – 20 K
JET-18XN; JRT-17XN 40 … 100°C ST JET-133X * 40 … 100°C ST
JET-18XNF 40 … 100°C ST JET-133XF 40 … 100°C ST
JET-10X; JRT-12XN; 70 … 130°C 2–20 K JET-140X 70 … 130°C 2 – 20 K
JET-140XF 70 … 130°C 2 – 20 K
JET-12X; JRT-16X; 70 … 130°C ST JET-143X * 70 … 130°C ST
JET-12XF 70 … 130°C ST JET-143XF 70 … 130°C ST
JET-13; JRT-13A 100 … 280°C 8–50 K JET-150 100 … 280°C 8 – 50 K
JET-13F 100 … 280°C 8–50 K JET-150F 100 … 280°C 8 – 50 K
JET-15 100 … 280°C ST JET-153 100 … 280°C ST
JET-153F 100 … 280°C ST

JET-20N; JRT-21N; –35 … +20°C 2–15 K


JET-21N; JRT-20N; –35 … +20°C 1 K, fixed
JET-22; JRT-26 –15 … +30°C 2–15 K
JET-23; JRT-22 –15 … +30°C 1 K, fixed JET-110R –35 … +30°C 2 – 20 K
JET-20NF; –35 … +20°C 2–15 K
JET-21NF; JRT-20NF –35 … +20°C 1 K, fixed
JET-22F; JRT-26F –15 … +30°C 2–15 K
JET-23F; JRT-22F –15 … +30°C 1 K, fixed JET-110RF –35 … +30°C 2 – 20 K
JET-24; JRT-27; 10 … 55°C 2–15 K
JET-25; JRT-24 10 … 55°C 1 K, fixed JET-120R 0 …  60°C 2 – 20 K
Miscellaneous

JET-24F; JRT-27F 10 … 55°C 2–15 K


JET-26F; 25 … 55°C 2–15 K
JET-25F; JRT-24F 10 … 55°C 1 K, fixed JET-120RF 0 …  60°C 2 – 20 K
JRT-27FH 10 … 55°C 3 K, fixed JET-121RF * 0 …  60°C 3 K, fixed
* Phase-out type
Catalogue 2007 | Page 161
Temperature PT 100 PT 1000 NI 1000 NI 1000 NTC NTC NTC NTC NTC NTC NTC KTY LM
TK 5000 1.8 KΩ 3 KΩ 10 KΩ 10 K Pre 20 KΩ 30 KΩ 50 KΩ 11-6 235 Z
°C Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω mVolt
-50 80,30 803,00 742,55 790,88 76900 201034 672283 441667 1662491 2497829 4100482 1035,91 2232,00
-45 82,30 823,00 766,76 810,75 56400 141496 473168 323859 1154939 1734646 2853741 1086,62
-40 84,30 843,00 791,31 830,84 41800 100861 337137 239831 811969 1220160 2010426 1139,27 2332,00
-35 86,20 862,00 816,21 851,15 30900 72755 243033 179280 577385 866735 1432643 1193,86
-30 88,20 882,00 841,46 871,69 24500 53073 177155 135233 415065 622944 1031995 1250,39 2432,00

Catalogue 2007 | Page 162


-25 90,20 902,00 867,04 892,47 18500 39126 130508 102890 301497 452550 751012 1308,85
-20 92,20 922,00 892,96 913,48 14000 29133 97119 78930 221192 331876 551835 1396,25 2532,00
-15 94,10 941,00 919,22 934,74 10900 21898 72974 61030 163829 245785 409211 1431,58
-10 96,10 961,00 945,82 956,24 8400 16608 55338 47549 122453 183697 306099 1495,86 2632,00
-5 98,00 980,00 972,74 977,99 6600 12703 42333 37316 92330 138502 230871 1562,07
0 100,00 1000,00 1000,00 1000,00 5200 9795 32658 29490 70203 105305 175509 1630,21 2732,00
5 102,00 1020,00 1027,59 1022,26 4140 7616 25397 23462 53809 80713 134475 1700,29
Sensor characteristics (1)

10 103,90 1039,00 1055,52 1044,79 3330 5968 19903 18787 41563 62347 103859 1772,32 2832,00
15 105,80 1058,00 1083,77 1067,59 2700 4712 15713 15136 32342 48511 80824 1846,27
20 107,80 1078,00 1112,36 1090,65 2200 3747 12492 12268 25346 38019 63353 1922,17 932,00
25 109,70 1097,00 1141,29 1113,99 1800 3000 10000 10000 20000 30000 50000 2000,00 2982,00
30 111,70 1117,00 1170,56 1137,62 1480 2417 8056 8197 15885 23828 39721 2079,77 3032,00
35 113,60 1136,00 1200,16 1161,52 1230 1960 6530 6754 12697 19046 31752 2161,47
40 115,50 1155,00 1230,11 1185,71 1040 1598 5325 5594 10211 15317 25535 2245,17 3132,00
45 117,50 1175,00 1260,41 1210,20 870 1311 4368 4656 8259 12390 20652 1330,7
50 119,40 1194,00 1291,05 1234,98 740 1081 3602 3893 6719 10079 16795 1418,21 3232,00
55 121,30 1213,00 1322,05 1260,06 630 896 2986 3271 5495 8244 13735 1527,67
60 123,20 1232,00 1353,40 1285,45 540 746 2488 2760 4518 6778 11293 2599,06 3332,00
65 125,50 1252,00 1385,12 1311,14 465 624 2084 2339 3733 5601 9332 2692,38
70 127,10 1271,00 1417,21 1337,15 402 525 1753 1990 3100 4651 7749 2787,65 3432,00
75 129,00 1290,00 1449,67 1363,47 350 444 1482 1700 2586 3880 6465 2884,85
80 130,90 1309,00 1482,50 1390,12 306 377 1258 1458 2167 3251 5418 2983,99 3532,00
85 132,80 1328,00 1515,73 1417,09 270 321 1072 1255 1824 2737 4560 3085,06
90 134,70 1347,00 1549,34 1444,39 240 275 917,30 1084 1542 2313 3854 3188,08 3632,00
95 136,60 1366,00 1583,36 1472,03 210 236 788,10 939,60 1309 1963 3270 3293,03
100 138,50 1385,00 1617,79 1500,00 187 203 679,70 817,20 1115 1673 2785 3399,91 3732,00
105 140,40 1404,00 1652,62 1528,32 166 176 588,30 713,00 953,7 1431 2382 3508,74
110 142,30 1423,00 1687,89 1556,98 149 153 511,00 624,10 818,7 1228 2044 3619,5 3832,00
115 144,20 1442,00 1723,58 1586,00 130 134 445,30 547,90 705,3 1058 1760 3732,19
120 146,10 1461,00 1759,72 1615,37 118 117 389,40 482,50 609,8 914 1519 3846,83 3932,00
125 148,00 1480,00 1796,30 1645,10 108 103 341,60 426,00 528,9 793 1315 3963,40
130 149,80 1498,00 1833,35 1675,19 95 90 300,50 377,20 460,2 690 1142 4081,91
140 153,60 1536,00 1908,87 1736,48 77 71 234,70 298,10 351,7 527 867 4324,74
150 157,30 1573,00 1986,35 1799,27 64 56 185,30 238,00 271,9 408 665 4575,31
Temperature NTC-0 NTC-1 NTC-2 NTC-3 NTC-4 NTC-5 NTC-6 NTC-8 PTC-51 PTC-57
2K25 1KO 47K 8K 10K 50K 100K 2K 1K 2K
°C Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω
-50 151398 32540 3152409 537827 672283 2820844 8276704 77977 510 1051
-45 106557 24432 2230085 378534 473168 2027885 5751387 57655 535 1103
-40 75923 18515 1595524 269709 337137 1473182 4044707 43039 562 1156
-35 54731 14156 1153886 194427 243033 1080969 2877133 32427 589 1212
-30 39895 10916 843120 141724 177155 800794 2069021 24651 617 1269
-25 29390 8486 622133 104107 130508 598684 1503450 18902 647 1328
-20 21871 6648 463401 77696 97120 451517 1103398 14615 677 1390
-15 16434 5248 348285 58379 72973 343390 817535 11391 708 1453
-10 12462 4172 264028 44269 55337 263262 611269 8947 740 1518
-5 9533 3340 201812 33866 42333 203390 461045 7079 773 1586
0 7355 2691 155480 26126 32658 158300 350656 5642 807 1655
5 5719 2182 120696 20318 25397 124082 268840 4527 842 1726
Sensor characteristics (2)

10 4482 1780 94377 15923 19903 97925 207702 3657 877 1799
15 3539 1460 74314 12570 15713 77789 161654 2973 914 1874
20 2813 1205 58910 9994 12492 62184 126708 2431 951 1951
25 2252 1000 47000 8000 10000 50000 100000 2000 990 2030
30 1814 834 37732 6445 8056 40455 79428 1654 1029 2111
35 1471 699 30472 5224 6530 32910 63489 1376 1070 2194
40 1199 588 24750 4260 5325 26916 51056 1151 1111 2279
45 984 498 20214 3494 4368 22129 41297 967 1153 2366
50 811 423 16597 2882 3602 18285 33591 816 1196 2456
55 673 361 13697 2389 2986 15182 27470 693 1241 2545
60 560 309 11360 1991 2488 12664 22582 590 1286 2638
65 469 266 9466 1667 2084 10612 18656 505 1331 2733
70 395 230 7925 1402 1753 8931 15478 434 1378 2829
75 334 199 6664 1185 1481 7547 12917 374 1426 2928
80 283 173 5627 1006 1258 6404 10821 324 1475 3029
85 241 151 4771 857 1072 5456 9105 282 1525 3131
90 207 133 4062 734 917 4665 7693 246 1575 3236
95 177 117 3471 631 788 4004 6527 215 1627 3342
100 153 103 2978 544 680 3448 5559 189 1679 3451
105 132 91 2563 471 588 2980 4752 167 1732 3561
110 115 81 2215 409 511 2584 4077 147 1786 3674
115 100 72 1919 356 445 2248 3511 130 1841 3788
120 88 64 1669 12 389 1962 3033 116 1896 3905
125 77 57 1456 273 342 1717 2629 103 1950 4023
130 68 51 1274 240 301 1507 2287 91 2003 4143
140 53 41 984 188 235 1171 1745 73 2103 4390
150 42 34 769 148 185 920 1348 60 2189 4644

Catalogue 2007 | Page 163


Miscellaneous
Technical terms

Bimetal sensing element:

Generally speaking, thermal bimetal sensing elements consist of layers of different metals or alloys of almost the same thickness that are firmly con-
nected with each other. These metal or alloy strips possess different thermal expansion qualities. This is why the bimetal strip curves at temperature
changes in such manner that a hollow curve is formed at the side at which the layer with the lower thermal expansion exists. The heat needed for the
operation of the bimetal strip or bimetal sensing element is transferred either via thermal conduction, radiation or heat dissipation from the surroundings
(indirect heating).

Break contact (bimetal):

Break contact (bimetal): This control contact opens at rising and closes at falling temperatures (for “heating”).

Make contact (bimetal):

Make contact (bimetal): This control contact closes at rising and opens at falling temperatures (for “cooling”).

Changeover contact (bimetal):

Defines as a changeover switch with both break and make contact. The functions are the same as explained above with regard to the break and make
contacts

Switching difference (hysteresis):

The hysteresis defines as the time difference between the activation and deactivation of the controller heating system or of the controller itself.
Usually, a difference is to be made between the following:
a) The controller related switch temperature difference: This switch difference depends on the design of the device.
b) The room related switch temperature difference: This switch difference depends on the behaviour of the controlled overall system, i.e. on the floor
structure, the impact of foreign heat sources, the place of installation of the controller and of the controller itself.
The switch temperature difference relates always to the controller and it indicates not the switch temperature difference that actually arises as a
result of the controlled overall system. The switch temperature varies in dependence on the place of operation and the conditions that prevail at this
particular spot. The temperature that prevails within a certain room is always subjected to certain variations. These variations result as a consequence
of different factors, such as the switch temperature difference of the controller itself, the characteristics of the room that needs to be controlled like,
for example, the heating up speed, the actually occurring heat loss, etc.

Thermal recirculation / thermal feedback:

Technical measure implemented in order to achieve a more constant, scilicet likewise continuous temperature when using a two-position controller
for the control of a heating system. Usually it takes some time until the heat is, by the air flow that exists inside a certain room, being conveyed to the
corresponding controller. Until to the point the bimetal strip in the controller is being heated up to the desired switching point, there is often much more
heat energy underway than as desired and predefined by the set value actually adjusted at the controller. The effect of this thermal super-push can be
remedied only if the controller is turned off already before the time at which said super-push occurrs. This switching operation is realised by means of
a small heating resistor (thermal feedback resistor) that exists in the immediate vicinity of the bimetal element. As soon as the controller requests “heat
supply”, voltage is supplied to this resistor to the result that the resistor simulates the existence of a room temperature that is higher than the one that
actually does not yet exist. The consequential effect is that the controller is being switched off earlier than scheduled, scilicet the controller is being turned
off prior to the attaining of the actually adjusted room temperature level so that a thermal overshooting is being prevented.

Temperature decrease:

The temperature decrease is, just as explained earlier above with regard to the thermal recirculation or thermal feedback, realised by means of a special
resistor. The actuation of this resistor is effected either manually by means of the manual operation of a switch or through the operation of a switch
clock. Once actuated, a temperature is simulated to the bimetal sensing element that is by 4 K higher than the temperature that actually exists inside the
related room. If the controller has, for example, been set to 20°C, the temperature can consequently decrease by 4 K down to max. 16°C. In the event
the temperature decreases down to a point below that, the heating system is activated and deactivated again at a temperature level above 16°C. The
level of the decrease temperature actually to be realised depends on different factors, such as the quality of the heat insulation of the related building
and the desired temperature decrease time (for example one night, one weekend, holidays or similar).

Mechanical range suppression:

The mechanical range suppression is realised by means of so-called setting pins or setting elements (red / blue) that exist underneath of the related
adjusting knob. They enable to restrict the temperature setting range mechanically. An unintended misadjustment of the corresponding set values in, for
example, children‘s rooms or public buildings can thus be prevented.

Proportional band (p-band):

The so-called proportional band defines as the zone of the input variable within which the controller delivers a continuous output signal. This means
that, within this proportional band, the controller maintains the room temperature continuously at nearly always the same level (provided however that
the available calorific output of the heating system is sufficient).

Neutral zone:

The so-called neutral zone defines as the control range within which neither any heating nor any cooling operation takes place.

Defrosting:

Defrosting defines as de-icing or heating up of the heat exchangers or cooling units. Defrosting is needed in order to ensure that the system is main-
tained in a condition that allows to operate it efficiently.

Catalogue 2007 | Page 164


Technical terms

Air conditioning system: 2-pipe fan convector (fan coil unit):

2-pipe air conditioning systems are, in dependence on the requirements, supplied through the same pipe system either with heating or with cooling
water (forward and return flow).

Air conditioning system: 4-pipe fan convector (fan coil unit):

4-pipe air conditioning systems are, in dependence on the requirements, supplied through one heating or cooling circuit each with heating or cooling
water (4-pipes).

Heat pumps:

Use of heat pumps as air conditioning systems: Modern heat pumps can be used for both the cooling and heating of rooms. As processes can be
inversed in a reversible manner when using modern systems, they can be utilised for the execution of heating and cooling operations.

Cooling ceilings:

Cooling ceilings count among the group of systems that are usually described as surface air conditioning systems. Often, cooling ceilings are being
applied in offices for passive cooling purposes. To enable this, cool water (mostly of a temperature of 16°C) is being conveyed through a network of
small tubes to the result that the air in the room is cooled down. Deeper flow temperatures can, on account of the risk of the formation of defrost or
condensed water.

Reversing valves:

Reversing valves (four-way valves) enable to realise a reversing cycle. The condenser is, in the course of this cycle, used as vaporiser in such manner
that the cooling unit is getting warmer and is thus being defrosted.

Vaporisers / condensers (liquefiers):

A liquefier or condenser is a heat conveyor, which is used in refrigeration systems inside of which a medium, through the dissipation of heat, is being
liquefied that is in the vapour state. Usually, the coolant is cooled down in the condenser to a much lower temperature level. The condenser used in
refrigeration system is, in order to distinguish the term from the one used in German language to define an electrical capacitor (“Kondensator” in German
in both cases), termed in German as a so-called “liquefier”. As the liquid medium is being vaporised in it through the supply of heat, the vaporiser by
contrast causes exactly the opposite process.

Split- and multi-split type air conditioners:

Split type air conditioners consist of at least two heat exchangers, one of which is installed inside the room that is to be cooled. This heat exchanger
operates as vaporiser, while the other is used for the dissipation of the absorbed heat. Most of the currently applied split type air conditioning systems
enable the operation in inverse mode, scilicet can be also be used for the heating of the related rooms in the event the supply of heat was required.
So-called multi-split type air conditioning systems consist of several vaporisers that are all connected to one condenser (liquefier).

PWM (pulse width modulation):

Procedure for the generation of a quasi-continuous transfer behaviour of a controlled system. The time constant associated with a certain transmission
path is influenced by the variation of the duty cycle at the path input in such manner that a quasi-continuous signal form is being created at its output.

Actuating drives / actuators:

Explain as electrically addressable valves for the control of, for example, the passage of warm water through a heating system. Usually, one distingu-
ishes between so-called ON/OFF and proportional actuators. Proportional valves are used for the connection of controllers the control behaviour of
which is quasi-continuous.

Continuous controllers:

These controllers deliver an analogue output signal. The value of the analogue output signal varies continuously, scilicet without any discontinuities in
dependence on the output signal.

Two-point control procedure (ON / OFF control procedure):

Explains as a so-called control algorithm that, for example upon the transgression of the set temperature, effects the deactivation of the system and
causes its reactivation once the set temperature is being underrun. Both the room and the temperature inside of it are always subject to certain varia-
tions (control deviations). These variations are a consequence of the typical switching difference of the controller and the characteristics of the related
room, such as the required heating up speed, the heat loss actually occurred, etc.

Three-point control:
Miscellaneous

Three-point controllers enable to perform control operations in or between the three operating modes “heating”, “neutral zone” and “cooling”.

Catalogue 2007 | Page 165


Useful hints for electrical and heating device fitters
Berlin 1000 / 2000 / 3000

Problem Cause

The temperature variation in a certain room is de- 1.) The neutral conductor was not connected to terminal 4 of the controller.
tected to be very high (approx. 5 – 8 K).
2.) The neutral N has been connected to terminal 4 of the controller, but was con-
nected to the distribution system (distribution box, fuse box).

It is found that the adjusting knob (director) requires 1.) The incoming or outgoing (switched) phase were confused. This is why there is
to be set to a temperature level above the desired permanently voltage present at the feedback resistor with the same result as if
room temperature. there was a temperature decrease operation going on in the related room. What
is more, the temperature variation actually to be noticed is very high (approx.
5 – 8 K)

2.) The calorific output of the heating system with respect to the room that needs
to be heated is too weak. This is why the operating time of the controller is too
long. In consequence, the feedback resistor too is active for too long with the
same result as if there was a temperature decrease operation going on in the
related room.

3.) Foreign heat sources (e.g. solar radiation, the TV, a lamp, etc.) exert an influ-
ence on the controller. The influence of these foreign heat sources simulates
the existence of a higher temperature level to the controller, so that the room is
heated up insufficiently.

It is found that the adjusting knob (director) requires 1.) The controller has, for example, been installed behind a curtain, on an outside
to be set to a temperature level below the desired wall or next to a door. This is why a lower temperature level is simulated to the
room temperature. controller with the result that the room is overheated.

The room does not get warm. 1.) An actuator is defective or fails to open the related valve.

2.) Coarse dust from the building site may have intruded into the controller. The dirt
accumulated inside of the controller prevents the related contact from closing.

3.) The controllers installed in two rooms have been connected in series. These
rooms will get warm only if both controller contacts are closed.

Further useful information:

1.) E
 specially with floor heating systems special attention must be paid to the fact that the response times can be very long. The related room is, in con-
sequence of that, heated up very slowly and will also cool down very slowly (the effects of solar radiation, for example, can lead to an overheating).
This is why it was pointless to expect that it would simply suffice to raise the adjusting knob on the controller in order to attain, in the previously
cooled down room, the desired room temperature within only the shortest possible space of time.

2.) W
 ith well insulated rooms it must also be considered that the room temperature prevailing in any such rooms will fall only very slowly. This is why it
may happen that the room temperature decreases, in spite of the nocturnally performed “decrease mode” operation (temperature by 4 K lower, for
example), only by a little extent so that no activation of the heating system takes place during a longer period of time.

3.) V
 ery frequently, the dirt produced at a building site that penetrated into the bimetal controller impairs the function of the device or even renders it
completely inoperative. This is why care should be taken to install the controller or controllers only after the completion of all necessary puttying,
paint- or wallpapering works. Always take care to ensure therefore that the pollution of the device with drilling dirt is excluded.

Catalogue 2007 | Page 166


Table of contents ordered by product names

Product Type PG Page


Accessories 154 – 160
Air flow measuring transducers FS J 142
Air flow sensing relays for use in air ducts JSL-1E G 90
Air heater thermostats, capillary system, 2 functions JTL-2…-11 B 70 – 71
Air heater thermostats, capillary system, 3 functions JTL-4 NR ... -17 NR B 70 – 71
Air temperature sensors LF S 119
Built-in duct sensors with active output EKFM S 128 – 129
Built-in duct sensors with passive output EKF S 124 – 127
Built-in duct sensors with passive output GFL S 124 – 127
Brightness sensors (outdoor) AHS S 146 
Brightness sensors (indoor) RHS S 146 
Bimetal controllers (thermostats) for flush installation FTR M 12 – 14
Built-in duct sensors – passive / active EKF…/GFL…/IKF... S 124 – 134
Bimetal climate controllers (surface installation) KTBSB-… A 39
Bimetal climate controllers (surface installation) PTR 02 A 38
Bimetal room temperature / climate controllers (surface installation) PTR 02…/KTBSB-… A 38 – 39
Bimetal room temperature controllers (for surface installation or fully packaged) PTR 01.4... A 15
for the control of mobile heating devices
Bimetal room temperature controllers (surface installation) RTBSB… (PTR) A 8 – 11
Bimetal room temperature controllers (flush installation) FTR M 12 – 14
Capillary thermostats for industrial applications (old / new) Type comparison B 161
Clip-on temperature sensors with active output ALFM S 136 – 137
Clip-on temperature sensors with passive output ALF S 136– 137
Clip-on thermostats (capillary system) ATR 83 B 72 – 73
Clip-on thermostats (capillary system) JAT-... B 72 – 73
Clip-on thermostats (capillary system) WR 81.115 / WR 81.117 B 72 –73
Controller for the control of gutter heating systems, capillary system, with outdoor sensor JET-32 B 58
Channel thermostats, capillary system JTU-1...-50 B 69
Controls for the remote operation of climate controllers PFB A 47
Clock controlled electronic thermostats (surface installation) HTRRBu-… (MTRU) A 23
Clock controlled electronic thermostats (surface installation) for floor heating systems HTRRBu-… (METRU) A 25 – 26
Clock controlled electronic thermostats (flush installation) FDTR-U 101.100 A 24
Clock controlled electronic thermostats (flush installation) for floor heating systems FDTR-U 101.130…140 A 27 – 28
Clock controlled electronic temperature controllers (thermostats) for flush installation FDTR-U A 24, 27 – 28
Capillary 2-stage thermostats JMT-2 … B 62
Differential pressure switches, adjustable JDL-111...-117 G 92 – 93
Differential pressure switches, adjustable JDW-3 / -5 / -10 G 92 – 93
Differential pressure switches, fixly adjusted JDL-109/-103 G 92 – 93
Digital temperature indicators (1 to 8 measuring points) JDI-0 / -08 F 86
Digital thermostat, temperature adjustment via “turning knob”, with remote sensor ITR 71 F 87
Digital thermostat, temperature adjustment via “POT”, with remote sensor JDI-1 / -10 F 87
Duct air quality sensors KLS S 144 – 145
Differential pressure measuring transducers (air) DF J 138 – 139
Dip sleeves for KR 80... and KR 85… THK/NTHK K 154 – 155
Dip sleeves for HF, EKF, IKF, MWF (Ø 6 mm) THMs/THV S 157
Dip sleeves for capillary- and frost protection thermostats and sleeve sensors (Ø 7 mm) TH/NTH K 156
Dip sleeves with 80 mm neck pipe for EKF, IKF (Ø 6 mm) THVH S 157
Miscellaneous

Dew point sensors TPS 1/2/3 A 45 – 46


Electronic 8-stage temperature controller with remote sensor JBT-8 E 84 – 85
Electronic temperature difference thermostat ETR 78 E 78

Catalogue 2007 | Page 167


Table of contents ordered by product names

Product Type PG Page


Electronic floor temperature / tiled stove temperature controllers (surface installation) PETR 01… (HTRRB) A 19 – 20
Electronic floor temperature controllers (surface installation) HTRRB… (PETR 01…) A 19 – 20
Electronic floor temperature controllers (flush installation) FETR A 21 – 22
Electronic tiled stove surface temperature controllers HTRRB… (PETR 01…) A 19 – 20
Electronic cooling ceiling controllers (surface installation) KTRRB-04… (PETR 75) A 42 – 43
Electronic cooling ceiling controllers (flush installation) KTRRU A 44
Electronic climate controllers (surface installation) KTRRB-112… (METR) A 40 – 41
Electronic cooling ceiling controllers (surface installation) KTRRB-04… (PETR 75) A 42 – 43
Electronic cooling ceiling controllers (flush installation) KTRRU A 44
Empty enclosure with terminal screws for installation on THMs and THV Empty enclosure KR 80.1 S 158
Electronic air flow monitors JSL-20/21 J 91
Electronic room temperature / climate controllers (surface installation) KTRRB-112…(METR) A 40 – 41
Electronic thermostats for installation in switch cabinets (on DIN rail) ITR 79 A 79 – 80
Electronic 6-stage temperature controllers with remote sensor JBT-6 E 84 – 85
Electronic continuous action controllers with internal or external sensor KTRVB… (PETA) A 16 – 18
Electronic continuous action controllers with internal or external sensor META 75. ... A Catalogue 2005
Electronic dew point monitors NEHR/WFRRN A 45 – 46
Electronic temperature controllers for floor heating systems (surface installation) HTRRB… (PETR 01. …) A 19 – 20
Electronic temperature controllers for floor heating systems (flush installation) FETR A 21
Electronic temperature controller for the control of tiled stoves (surface installation) HTRRB… (PETR 01. …) A 19 – 20
Electronic temperature controllers (thermostats) for flush installation FETR A 21 – 22
Electronic 4-stage temperature controllers with remote sensor JBT-4 E 84 – 85
Electronic two-stage temperature controllers with remote sensor JBT -2 E 83
Frost protection thermostats, capillary system, switching JTF-1...-25 C 74 – 75
Frost protection thermostats, capillary system, continuous and switching JTF-31 / JTF-35 J 76
Frames for the installation of all 50 x 50 UP devices Frames S 158
Flow monitors for the supervision of liquid media JSF-1E...-4E G 94 – 95
Flow monitors for the supervision of liquid media JSW G 96
Humidity transducers with active output for use in outdoor areas AFT S 147
Hygrostats (flush installation) FHY 101.060 A 48 – 49
Hygrostats (surface installation) RFHSB (PHY) A 48 – 49
Hygrothermostats (flush installation) RKDSB (MHT) A 48 – 49
Hygrostats for installation in ducts or switch cabinets (1- and 2-stage) HI B 50 – 51
Humidity measuring transducers (room and duct versions) FF J 148 – 150
Hygrostats for installation in switch cabinets PHY 60.082 A 50 – 51
Industrial built-in duct sensors with active output IKF 1 M S 133 – 134
Industrial built-in duct sensors with passive output IKF 1 … S 130 – 132
Installation flange for EKF, IKF, MWF MF S 157
Motion sensors (outdoor) ABS S 143
Motion sensors (indoor) RBS S 143
Microprocessor controller for PT 100 / PT 1000 sensors and measuring transducers JDU-210 J 88
Microprocessor controller for PT 100 sensors JDI-22 J 88
Mean temperature sensors with active output MWFM S 122 – 123
Mean temperature sensors with passive output MWF S 122 – 123
Outdoor temperature sensors with active output and led-through sensor sleeve AFHM S 114 – 115
Outdoor temperature sensors with passive output and led-through sensor sleeve AFH S 114 – 115
Outdoor temperature sensors with passive output and internal sensor AF S 112 – 113
One-stage industry room thermostats, capillary system, 2 separated setting ranges, JET-30 / -31 B 58
outdoor sensor
One-stage industry room thermostats, capillary system, with outdoor sensor JET-1...R B 56

Catalogue 2007 | Page 168


Table of contents ordered by product names

Product Type PG Page


One-stage industry room thermostats, capillary system, with outdoor sensor JET-40 / -41 B 56
One-stage capillary thermostats JET-1... B 60 – 61
One-stage capillary thermostats WR 81.0... / WR 81.1... B 59
Outdoor temperature sensor (passive / active) AF, AFH, AFHM S 112 – 115
Pressure measuring transducers (liquids / gases) MUD S 140 – 141
PWM controllers JDS-210 J 89
Protector (ball- / sun-/ rain protection) for A F, AFH, AFHM Protector 01 S 158
Protective sleeve for sleeve sensor HF (Ø 7.7 up to 8.9 mm) for the installation into the pave- THF K 156
ment
Protective spiral for capillary thermostats, sleeve and air sensors SW-200/SW-200-12 K 154 – 155
Protective spiral for LR 80/85 SWK K 154 – 155
Plug-in socket XA-PTR 2 A 15
Radio control receivers (1- / 4- / 8-channel) HTFR… A 32 – 33
Radio control transmitters (with and without clock) FTRFB... / FTRFBu … A 30 – 31
Radio control, overview of transmitters and receivers A 29
Remote controls for climate controllers, air conditioning systems, etc. (surface installation) PFB A 47
Rod thermostats for use as boiler double controller, capillary system KR 85... B 67
Rod thermostats for use as boiler double controller / safety temperature limiter, KR 85.3 B 68
capillary system
Rod thermostats for use as boiler controllers, capillary system KR 80 … B 64 – 65
Rod thermostat for use as ventilation double controller / LR 85.315-5 B 68
safety temperature limiter, capillary system
Rod thermostat for use as ventilation control, capillary system LR 80 … B 63
Rod thermostat for use as safety temperature limiter, capillary system KR 80.3/LR 80.3 B 66
Room pendulum temperature sensors PF S 120 – 121
Room air quality sensors RLS S 144 – 145
Room temperature sensors (surface installation) RF S 100 – 101
Room temperature sensors (surface installation) PTF S 100 – 105
Room temperature sensors (flush installation) FUF S 106 – 111
Room radiation temperature sensors STF S 120 – 121
Safety temperature limiters, capillary system KR 80.3/LR 80.3 B 66
Sensors all types S 99  –  150
Sensor characteristics all types S 162 – 163
Sleeve type temperature sensors HF S 116 – 118
Surface temperature sensors OF S 135
Switch cabinet temperature controller PTR 01.082 A 11
Table of contents ordered by product names 167 – 169
Table of contents ordered by type designation codes 170 – 172
Technical terms 164 – 165
Temperature and humidity transducers for use in outdoor areas AFT S 147
Temperature- and humidity transducers for use in outdoor areas (active / passive) ATFT S 147
Temperature and humidity measuring transducers (room and duct versions) FTF J 148 – 150
Temperature measuring transducers (room and duct versions) TF J 148 – 150
Universal thermostat - electronic controller with remote sensor and digital indication, ETR 74 J 82
one-/two-stage type
Universal thermostat - electronic controller with remote sensor, one-stage type ETR 77 A 81
Useful hints for electrical and heating device fitters Useful hints 166
Wet room thermostats / double thermostats (bimetal type) PTR 40 / 45 A 77
Miscellaneous

2-stage industry room thermostats, capillary system, with remote sensor JMT-211/-212 B 57
3-point control input controller for use with motor-driven actuators / PWM controller JDS-210 J 89
4-stage industry room thermostats, capillary system, with remote sensor JMT-411 B 57

Catalogue 2007 | Page 169


Table of contents ordered by type designation codes

Type PG Product Page


Accessories K/S 154 – 160
ABS S Motion sensors (outdoor) 143
AF S Outdoor temperature sensors with passive output and internal sensor 112 – 113
AFH S Outdoor temperature sensors with active output and led-through sensor sleeve 114 – 115
AFHM S Outdoor temperature sensors with active output and led-through sensor sleeve 114 – 115
AFT S Humidity transducers with active output for use in outdoor areas 147
AHS S Brightness sensors (outdoor) 146 
ALF S Clip-on temperature sensors with passive output 136 – 137
ALFM S Clip-on temperature sensors with active output 136 – 137
ATFT S Temperature and humidity transducers for use in outdoor areas (active / passive) 147
ATR 83 B Clip-on thermostats (capillary system) 72 – 73
DF J Differential pressure measuring transducers (air) 138 – 139
EKF S Built-in duct sensors with passive output 124 – 127
EKFM S Built-in duct sensors with active output 128 – 129
ETR 74 J Universal thermostat-electronic controller with remote sensor and digital indication, 82
one-/two-stage type
ETR 77 A Universal thermostat-electronic controller with remote sensor, one-stage type 81
ETR 78 E Electronic temperature difference thermostat 78
FDTR-U 101.100 A Clock controlled electronic temperature controllers (thermostats) for flush installation 24
FDTR-U 101.130…140 A Clock controlled electronic thermostats (flush installation) for floor heating systems 27 – 28
FETR A Electronic floor temperature controllers (flush installation) 21 – 22
FF J Temperature measuring transducers (room and duct versions) 148 – 150
FHY 101.060 A Hygrostats (flush installation) 48 – 49
FS J Air flow measuring transducers 142
FTF J Temperature and humidity measuring transducers (room and duct versions) 148 – 150
FTR M Bimetal room temperature controllers (flush installation) 12 – 14
FTRFB... / FTRFBu… A Radio control transmitters (with and without clock) 30 –  31
FUF S Room temperature sensors (flush installation) 106 – 111
GFL S Built-in duct sensors with passive output 124 – 127
HF S Sleeve type temperature sensors 116 – 118
HI B Hygrostats for installation in ducts or switch cabinets (1- and 2-stage) 50 – 51
HTFR… A Radio control receivers (1- / 4- / 8-channel) 32 – 33
HTRRB… (PETR 01. …) A Electronic floor temperature controllers (surface installation) 19 – 20
HTRRB… (PETR 01. …) A Electronic tiled stove surface temperature controllers 19 – 20
HTRRBu-… (MTRU) A Clock controlled electronic thermostats (surface installation) 23
HTRRBu-…(METRU) A Clock controlled electronic thermostats (surface installation) for floor heating systems 25 – 26
IKF 1 ... S Industrial built-in duct sensors with passive output 130 – 132
IKF 1 M S Industrial built-in duct sensors with active output 133 – 134
ITR 71 F Digital thermostat, temperature adjustment via “turning knob”, with remote sensor 87
ITR 79 A Electronic thermostats for installation in switch cabinets (on DIN rail) 79 – 80
JAT- … B Clip-on thermostats (capillary system) 72 – 73
JBT-2 E Electronic two-stage temperature controllers with remote sensor 83
JBT-4 E Electronic 4-stage temperature controller with remote sensor 84 – 85
JBT-6 E Electronic 6-stage temperature controller with remote sensor 84 – 85
JBT-8 E Electronic 8-stage temperature controller with remote sensor 84 – 85
JDI-0/-08 F Digital temperature indicators (1 to 8 measuring points) 86
JDI-1/-10 F Digital thermostat, temperature adjustment via “POT”, with remote sensor 87
JDI-21/-210 J Microprocessor controller for PT 100 sensors 88
JDI-22 J Microprocessor controller for PT 100 sensors 88
JDL-111 … -117 G Differential pressure switch, adjustable 92 – 93

Catalogue 2007 | Page 170


Table of contents ordered by type designation codes

Type PG Product Page


JDL-109/-113 G Differential pressure switch, fixly adjusted 92 – 93
JDR-10/-210 J Microprocessor controller for measuring transducers 88
JDS-210 J 3-point control input controller for use with motor-driven actuators / PWM controller 89
JDU-210 J Microprocessor controller for PT 100 / PT 1000 sensors and measuring transducers 88
JDW-3/-5/-10 G Differential pressure switches, adjustable 92 – 93
JET-1 ... B One-stage capillary thermostats 60 – 61
JET-1..R B One-stage industry room thermostats, capillary system, with outdoor sensor 56
JET-30/-31 B One-stage industry room thermostats, capillary system, 58
2 separated setting ranges, with outdoor sensor
JET-32 B Controller for the control of gutter heating systems, capillary system, with outdoor sensor 58
JET-40/-41 B One-stage industry room thermostats, capillary system, with outdoor sensor 56
JMT-2 … B Capillary 2-stage thermostats 62
JMT-211/-212 B 2-stage industry room thermostats, capillary system, with remote sensor 57
JMT-411 B 4-stage industry room thermostats, capillary system, with remote sensor 57
JSF-1E ...-4E G Flow monitors for the supervision of liquid media 94 – 95
JSL-1E G Air flow sensing relays for use in air ducts 90
JSL-20/21 J Electronic air flow monitors 91
JSW G Flow monitors for the supervision of liquid media 96
JTF-1 ...-25 C Frost protection thermostats, capillary system, switching 74 – 75
JTF-31/JTF-35 J Frost protection thermostats, capillary system, continuous and switching 76
JTL-2 …-11 B Air heater thermostats, capillary system, 2 functions 70 – 71
JTL-4 NR ... -17 NR B Air heater thermostats, capillary system, 3 functions 70 – 71
JTU-1 ... -50 B Channel thermostats, capillary system 69
KLS S Duct air quality sensors 144 – 145
KR 80 … B Rod thermostats for use as boiler controllers, capillary system 64 – 65
KR 80.3 B Rod thermostats for use as safety temperature limiters, capillary system 66
KR 85 ... B Rod thermostats for use as boiler double controller, capillary system 67
KR 85.3 B Rod thermostats for use as boiler double controller / safety temperature limiter, 68
capillary system
KTBSB-… A Electronic cooling ceiling controllers (surface installation) 39
KTRRB-04. … (PETR 75) A Electronic cooling ceiling controllers (surface installation) 42 – 43
KTRRB-112. … (METR) A Electronic cooling ceiling controllers (surface installation) 40 – 41
KTRRU A Electronic cooling ceiling controllers (flush installation) 44
KTRVB…(PETA) A Electronic continuous action controllers with internal or external sensor 16 – 18
Empty housing KR 80.1 S Empty enclosure with terminal screws for installation on THMs and THV 158
LF S Air temperature sensors 119
LR 80 … B Rod thermostat for use as ventilation control, capillary system 63
LR 80.3 B Rod thermostat for use as safety temperature limiter, capillary system 66
LR 85.315-5 B Rod thermostat for use as ventilation double controller / 68
safety temperature limiter, capillary system
META 75. ... A Electronic continuous action controllers with internal or external sensor Catalogue 2005
METR 75. … (KTRRB) A Electronic climate controllers (surface installation) 40 – 41
METRU (HTRRBu) A Clock controlled electronic thermostats (surface installation) for floor heating systems 25 – 26
MF S Installation flange for EKF, IKF, MWF 157
MHT (RKDSB) A Hygrothermostats 48 – 49
MTR (KTBSB) A Bimetal climate controller (surface installation) 39
MTRU (HTRRBu) A Clock controlled electronic thermostats (surface installation) 23
Miscellaneous

MUD S Pressure measuring transducers (liquids / gases) 140 – 141


MWF S Mean temperature sensors with passive output 122 – 123
MWFM S Mean temperature sensors with active output 122 – 123

Catalogue 2007 | Page 171


Table of contents ordered by type designation codes

Type PG Product Page


NEHR/WFRRN A Electronic dew point monitors 45 – 46
NTH K Dip sleeves for capillary- and frost protection thermostats and sleeve sensors (Ø 7 mm) 156
NTHK K Dip sleeves V4A for KR 80. ... and KR 85. ... 154 – 155
OF S Surface temperature sensors 135
PETA 75. … (KTRVB) A Electronic continuous action controllers with internal or external sensor 16 – 18
PETR 01. … (HTRRB) A Electronic floor temperature / tiled stove temperature controllers (surface installation) 19 – 20
PETR 75. … (KTRRB-04…) A Electronic cooling ceiling controllers (surface installation) 42 – 43
PF S Room pendulum temperature sensors 120 – 121
PFB A Controls for the remote operation of climate controllers, air conditioning systems, etc. 47
(surface installation)
PHY (RFHSB) A Hygrostats (flush installation) 48 – 49
PHY 60.082 A Hygrostats for installation in switch cabinets 50 – 51
PTF S Room temperature sensors (surface installation) 100 – 105
PTR 01 …. (RTBSB) A Bimetal room temperature controller (surface installation) 8 – 11
PTR 01.082 A Switch cabinet temperature controller 11
PTR 01.4... A Bimetal room temperature controllers (for surface installation or fully packaged) 15
for the control of mobile heating devices
PTR 02 A Bimetal climate controllers (surface installation) 38
PTR 40 / 45 A Wet room thermostats / double thermostats (bimetal type) 77
Frames S Frames for the installation of all 50 x 50 UP devices 158
RBS S Motion sensors (indoor) 143
RF S Room temperature sensor (surface installation) 100 – 101
RFHSB (PHY) A Hygrostats (flush installation) 48 – 49
RHS S Brightness sensors (indoor) 146 
RKDSB (MHT) A Hygrothermostats (flush installation) 48 – 49
RLS S Room air quality sensors 144 – 145
RTBSB… (PTR) A Bimetal room temperature sensor (surface installation) 8 – 11
Protector 01 S Protector (ball- / sun-/ rain protection) for A F, AFH, AFHM 158
Sensor characteristics Table of sensor characteristics 162 – 163
STF S Room radiation temperature sensors 120 – 121
SW-200/SW-200-12 K Protective spiral for capillary thermostats, sleeve and air sensors 154 – 155
SWK K Protective spiral for LR 80/85 154 – 155
Technical terms 164 – 165
TF J Temperature measuring transducers (room and duct versions) 148 – 150
TH K Dip sleeves for capillary- and frost protection thermostats and sleeve sensors (Ø 7 mm) 156
THF K Protective sleeve for sleeve sensor HF (Ø 7.7 up to 8.9 mm) 156
for the installation into the pavement
THK K Dip sleeves for KR 80. ... and KR 85. … 154 – 155
THMs S Dip sleeves for HF, EKF, IKF, MWF (Ø 6 mm) 157
THV S Dip sleeves for HF, EKF, IKF, MWF (Ø 6 mm) 157
THVH S Dip sleeves with 80 mm neck pipe for EKF, IKF (Ø 6 mm) 157
Useful hints Useful hints for electrical and heating device fitters 166
TPS 1/2/3 A Dew point sensors 45 – 46
Type comparison Capillary thermostats for industrial applications (old / new) 161
WR 81.0.. /WR 81.1.. B One-stage capillary thermostats 59
WR 81.115 /WR 81.117 B Clip-on thermostats, capillary system 72 – 73
XA-PTR 2 A Plug-in socket 15

Catalogue 2007 | Page 172


Miscellaneous

Catalogue 2007 | Page 173


General terms of delivery
All our deliveries are executed subject to the latest issue of the General Conditions for the Supply of Products
and Services of the Electrical and Electronics Industry and also subject to our own terms of delivery.

All products comply with the relevant rules, standards and directives issued by the European Commission.

The minimum order value (net invoice value of goods) is 100.00 EUR. For all orders below this minimum
value, we reserve the right to impose a reduced quantity surcharge in the amount of 20.00 EUR.

The pricing terms are as follows: ex works incl. packaging plus legal VAT rate.

Concerning all goods returned for crediting purposes (in original packed and unused condition), the
returning of which had been jointly agreed upon beforehand, we reserve the right to withhold an amount
equivalent to 30 % of the invoice value of the goods in question, at least however an amount of 30.00
EUR net for the examination, analysis and handling costs actually incurred.

We request that all returns be sent in to our head office address at:
ALRE-IT Regeltechnik GmbH
Richard-Tauber-Damm 10
D-12277 Berlin

Safety regulations
With all products from which hazards or risks can originate on account of electrical energy, the relevant VDE
regulations currently operative and in force need to be followed and complied with by all means. In this con-
nection, special reference is made here to the following basic rules, standards and prescriptions:

VDE 0100  VDE 0550 10551  VDE 0700  VDE 0711  VDE 0860

The observance and compliance with building- and safety regulations of all kinds (issued be the VDE, the TÜV,
the trade associations, etc.) rests and is incumbent on the user/purchaser of the related product. Concerning a
deepening description of the servicing and maintenance of the devices and of the regulations on the safety of
equipment, the relevant country-specific rules and regulations need to be consulted and to be complied with in
any case. If you should not be familiar with any of these rules and regulations, please consult a specialist by all
means!

All devices, parts and components itemised in this catalogue may be used only within the limits of the intended
use they have been specified for.

The duplication or reprography of this documentation, regardless whether fully, partially or in extracts and irre-
spective of the method used for it, without the explicit prior consent of ALRE-IT Regeltechnik GmbH, Berlin, is
prohibited. Place of jurisdiction for all legal actions arising out or in connection with this catalogue shall be the
competent court in Berlin, Germany.

All hitherto issued price lists cease to have effect with the release of this price list.

Subject to change without notice.

Information on technical data

The technical data specified herein have been determined under laboratory conditions and in compliance with
generally approves test regulations, in particular DIN standards. Technical characteristics can only be war-
ranted to this extent. The testing of the device with regard to the qualification and suitability for the client‘s
intended application or the use under service conditions shall be the client‘s own duty. We refuse to grant any
warranty with regard thereto. We reserve the right to modify or change our products for the sake and benefit of
their technical advancement and constant further improvement. Technical specifications may thus deviate from
those contained in this or other catalogues.

Note
For further products from our house, please visit our web site at: www.alre.de
Circulation: 2,000

Catalogue 2007 | Page 174


Head Office Representation Austria
Alre-IT Regeltechnik GmbH eh-technik
Richard-Tauber-Damm 10 Reinbacher GmbH + Co KG
D-12277 Berlin Fachvertrieb für Heizsysteme und
Phone: +49 (0) 30/399 84 - 0 Regeltechnik
Fax: +49 (0) 30/391 70 05 Gniglerstraße 54
E-mail: [email protected] A-5020 Salzburg
Internet: www.alre.de Phone: +43 (0) 662/87 00 53
Fax: +43 (0) 662/87 00 53 20
Manager Marketing & Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Klaus Lorenz Internet: www.eh-technik.at
Phone: +49 (0) 30 399 84 -214
Fax: +49 (0) 30 391 70 05 Representation Switzerland
E-mail: [email protected] Bachofen AG
Ackerstraße 42
Office CH-9610 Uster
Indoor Service Phone: +41 (44) 944 11 11
Phone: +49 (0) 30/399 84 -214 Fax: +41 (44) 944 12 33
Fax: +49 (0) 30/ 391 70 05 E-mail: [email protected]
E-mail: [email protected] Internet: www.bachofen.ch

Exports Representation United Kingdom


Ingo Möller Brian Tonge Agencies Ltd.
Phone: +49 (0) 30 / 399 84 -121 Allington House
Fax: +49 (0) 30 / 391 70 05 Rock Lane
E-mail: [email protected] Farnham
Indoor Service Surrey GU10 4SY
Phone: +49 (0) 30/399 84 -213 England
Fax: +49 (0) 30/ 391 70 05 E-mail: [email protected]
E-mail: [email protected] Phone: +44 (0) 1252 793876
Fax: +44 (0) 1252 793273

Miscellaneous
Catalogue 2007 | Page 175
Building Automation
Control Engineering
Sensors

Product Catalogue 2007


Produ
ct Cat
alogu
e 200
7
Building Automation · Control Engineering · Sensors

s
ing field
ngineer
lutions
ontrol e
ent So
for all c
ALRE-IT Regeltechnik GmbH Phone: +49 (0) 30 / 3 99 84-0
Richard-Tauber-Damm 10 Fax: +49 (0) 30 / 3 91 70 05
D-12277 Berlin

Intellig
Internet: www.alre.de
E-mail: [email protected]

You might also like